JP2020142120A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which the wear-and-tear of a movable type accessory is reduced.SOLUTION: A Pachinko-slot machine causes a rotary accessory to be operated in a predetermined manner during an ART and thereby makes a notification that a current game is during the ART and at the same time excites up, by using the rotary accessory, the game during the ART. Further, the Pachinko-slot machine counts the time of a non-manipulation time in which no manipulation from a player is received during the ART, and if the non-manipulation time exceeds a predetermined time, based on an assumption that the player is temporarily left the machine, returns an operation unit of the rotary accessory to an initial position. After that when the manipulation from the player is received, the rotary accessory is returned to a position before being returned to the initial position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 132

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, in order to improve game playability, a game machine provided with a decorative portion according to the model of the game machine is also known. The decorative part includes, for example, one that performs mechanical movement, light emission, or both, and such a decorative part is generally called a "accessory (movable accessory)". As a gaming machine using an accessory, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a rotating movable accessory is installed on an upper part of a front door.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-042691

By the way, in the movable accessory, the motor and the gear mechanism are consumed due to the load associated with the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, the effect peculiar to the movable accessory cannot be performed due to the occurrence of a failure. It will cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can reduce the consumption of movable accessories.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the consumption of movable accessories.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined movable portion (for example, the cover member 198) is in the first position (for example, the position where the eyeball main body 203 is invisible to the player) and the second position (for example, the eyeball main body). A movable accessory (for example, a rotating accessory 200) that can be moved at the position where 203 is exposed) and an accessory control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a rotating accessory) that controls the operation of the movable accessory. The control board 78) and a time measuring means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for measuring the time during which the game is not progressing are provided, and the accessory control means satisfies the movable accessory when a specific condition is satisfied. The predetermined movable portion of the above can be moved from the first position to the second position, the timing means starts timing at a predetermined timing, and the accessory control means measures the time measured by the timing means. When the time reaches a predetermined time, the predetermined movable portion of the movable accessory is moved from the second position to the first position, and when the game is subsequently advanced, the predetermined movable portion of the movable accessory It is characterized in that the movable portion of the above is moved to the second position.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. , The particular condition is characterized by a transition to the advantageous state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable accessory has a specific movable portion (for example, eyeball member 205) behind the predetermined movable portion, and the specific movable portion is the said. When the predetermined movable portion moves to the second position, it becomes visible, and the accessory control means is characterized in that by moving the specific movable portion, an effect peculiar to the advantageous state is executed. To do.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 and speakers 23L, 23R) capable of executing the effect, and the effect executing means determines the time measured by the time measuring means. When the time is reached, the production is performed in an energy-saving manner.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the movable accessory.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot. It is a schematic diagram of the display device provided in the said pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachislot. It is an exploded view of the rotating accessory of the pachislot. It is a perspective view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a perspective view of the rotating accessory in a state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is rotated to the right side. It is a perspective view which looked at the eyeball member, the left outer corner member and the right outer corner member of the pachislot from the back. It is a top view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a top view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot starts rotating from the neutral position to the right. It is a top view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the maximum moving position on the right side. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located in the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot starts rotating to the right from the neutral position. It is a bottom view of the rotating accessory in the state where the eyeball member of the pachislot is located at the maximum moving position on the right side. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of the game state controlled by the main control circuit of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the main ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination and the symbol combination in the said pachislot. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the internal winning role in the said pachislot. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the internal winning role in the said pachislot. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the carry-over combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area provided in the main RAM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state controlled by the sub-control circuit of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows a part of the correspondence relation between the type of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachislot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the management method of the production ball in the said pachislot. It is a schematic diagram of the transition lottery in the normal game state and the high probability game state of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the start stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the start stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the start stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse operation lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the apocalypse MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a MAP data correspondence table which shows the MAP data specified in the apocalypse MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table at the time of apocalypse operation stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the promotion method of the effect ball used in a normal game state and a high probability game state. It is a figure which shows the accessory movable lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the production ball promotion lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of a reel stop stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the high-probability game state of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the avoidance point lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the CZ of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ_MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a CZ_MAP correspondence table which shows the CZ mode specified in CZ_MAP. It is a figure which shows the invalid point lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the CZ middle production ball lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows a part of the correspondence relation between the type of the winning combination managed by the main control circuit of the pachislot, and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed by the sub control circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the BB of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the start in BB stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in BB stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in BB stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the end of BB stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in ART of the pachislot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in ART of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the boss MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a boss MAP data correspondence table which shows the boss MAP data specified in the boss MAP. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during the enemy decision ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the effect ball lottery table during the enemy decision ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the effect ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy decision ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the enemy determination ART medium ally power addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the boss power lottery table in the enemy decision ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a boss status correspondence table showing the status of the opponent in the battle ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a battle MAP data correspondence table which shows the battle MAP data specified in the battle MAP. It is a figure which shows the production ball lottery table during a battle ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during a battle ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the damage lottery table during a battle ART stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the ART state lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery processing of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process of the said pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the display method of the non-effect image in the panel display. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART lottery processing at the time of normal start of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the apocalypse operation process of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability game state transition process of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high-probability medium effect registration process of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows ART lottery processing at the time of CZ start of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows ART lottery processing in BB of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in ART of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the enemy determination ART of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the battle ART of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART lottery processing at the time of normal termination of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability transition determination processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability end determination processing of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result management process in CZ of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command of the sub CPU of the pachislot. It is a figure which shows the outline of the rewriting method of the production ball used in the enemy determination ART. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle MAP lottery table stored in the sub ROM of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ART lottery processing in BB of the sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control processing in BB of the sub CPU of the pachislot of another embodiment.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. Further, in the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than usual during a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT and the RT are operated at the same time will be described.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachi-slot machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side, and the right side and the left side of the pachi-slot machine 1 are the right side of the pachi-slot machine. They are called (right direction) and left side (left direction), respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction.

[Pachislot function flow]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 16 is operated, the pachislot 1 has one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means has a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 16 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). Determine the internal winning role.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. As for the types of symbol combinations, there are those that give the player benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc., and those related to other so-called "missing". Has been done.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 described later) serves as an internal winning combination. And the timing at which the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed, and the control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a predetermined time (190 msec) from the time when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means utilizes the above-mentioned specified time and the combination of the symbols is along the winning line as an effective line. Stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they are displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the winning line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line is related to winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the establishment or non-establishment of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the winning line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. Then, when it is determined that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in pachislot 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachislot machine, in the above-mentioned series of flows, image display performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, driving of a rotating accessory, Alternatively, various effects are performed using these combinations.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot]
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic view of the display device 10 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a as a housing for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 2c is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 2c is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. A plurality of reels (three in the present embodiment) 3L, 3C, 3R (FIG. 3). See) is housed. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. The plurality of (for example, 21) symbols described above are drawn on the surface of the sheet material described above.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9 and a display device 10 for displaying a predetermined effect. The door body 9 is rotatably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, the front door 2b has a display window 4 capable of visually recognizing the three reels 3L, 3C and 3R. The display window 4 is composed of three left display windows 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and are in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reels provided behind them is stopped. It is set to a size that can display three symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each region. Then, in the present embodiment, the line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning line for determining whether or not to win.

<Overview of display device 10>
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 3, the display device 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 11 and a panel device 400 provided on the front surface (player side) of the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, by linking the liquid crystal display device 11 and the panel device 400, the display device 10 displays an image related to a game effect and information related to the game.

The liquid crystal display device 11 not only executes an effect by displaying an image, but also, for example, when an error occurs in the pachislot machine 1 such as customization of the pachislot machine 1 or game table information (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a menu screen) or the pachislot machine 1. An error screen can be displayed to inform the clerk of the game store of the error content. The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as the effect is executed may be referred to as an "effect image", and an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the effect, such as a menu screen or an error screen, may be referred to. It is sometimes called a "non-directed image".

The panel device 400 is a panel device for a so-called illumination array (registered trademark), and is composed of a transparent light guide plate 401 and an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 403 arranged on the side of the light guide plate 401. The light guide plate 401 is a transparent panel having transparency such as an acrylic material. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light guide plate 401 is formed with a plurality of recesses (reflection recesses 402a) having a reflection surface that reflects light along the plate surface toward the player, and these plurality of reflections are formed. The latent image 402 shown in FIG. 3A is formed by the recess 402a.

The LED 403 is arranged on the side of the light guide plate 401 and emits light along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401. As such an LED 403, an LED array or the like in which a large number of LEDs are linearly provided is preferably used. As shown in FIG. 3B, the light emitted along the plate surface of the light guide plate 401 due to the light emission of the LED 403 is reflected to the front surface (player side) by the reflection recess 402a and is formed by the reflection recess 402a. The latent image 402 becomes visible to the player.

In such a display device 10, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the LED 403 does not emit light, the latent image 402 cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the player makes the light guide plate 401 transparent. It will be recognized as a board. As a result, the display device 10 will perform the effect according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

On the other hand, when the LED 403 is emitting light, the plurality of reflection recesses 402a reflect the light toward the player, so that the latent image 402 is visualized as shown in FIG. 3C, and the game is played. The person becomes visible. In such a case, the display device 10 will perform an effect using the panel device 400 or an effect in which the panel device 400 and the liquid crystal display device 11 are linked.

In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 401 has a latent image 402 indicating the characters "CHANGE !!", but the latent image 402 is not limited to such characters and is not limited to such characters. It may be, and an image such as a character's face may be drawn as well as a character.

Returning to FIG. 2, the protective glass 6 is arranged on the front side of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 described above. As a result, the player cannot directly touch the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display device 10 (liquid crystal display device 11 or panel device 400).

Further, a decorative member 7 is attached to the upper portion of the door body 9 on the front surface side so as to surround the protective glass 6. The decorative member 7 constitutes a part of the exterior of the pachi-slot machine 1, and includes an upper exterior member 7a, a pair of side exterior members 7b, and a lower exterior member 7c. In particular, the upper exterior member 7a is located above the liquid crystal display device 11 and in front of the rotating accessory 200, which will be described later.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 has various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, selection button 18, decision button) to be operated by the player. 19) is provided.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. That is, the medal insertion slot 13 is for inserting medals by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to be used for one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. The start lever 16 is for starting the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R) according to the operation of the player.

The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation of the player. ..

Further, these stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are used when performing an operation related to information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

The selection button 18 and the enter button 19 are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (for example, calling the menu screen or operating on the menu screen). Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 composed of a 7-segment LED. The 7-segment display 28 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). indicate.

A medal payout outlet 21, a medal tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 21 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 43, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 21. Further, the speakers 23L and 23R output sounds such as sound effects and songs corresponding to the contents of the production.

A waist panel 29 is provided between the pedestal portion 12 and the medal tray 22, and the waist panel 29 displays various information such as a model name and a combination of pachislot machines 1.

<Electrical configuration of pachislot machines>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 4, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b. The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 41. ing.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. The external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals. A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44.

When the power switch 44a is ON, the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, and the power supply device 44 supplies the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. When the power switch 44a is OFF, the power supply of the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off, and the power supply from the power supply device 44 to the pachi-slot machine 1 is stopped. The door relay terminal board 54 includes a medal sensor 46, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, a selection switch 67, a decision switch 68, and a sub. The relay board 69 is connected.

That is, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the decision switch 68, and the sub-relay board 69 are doors. It is connected to the main control board 41 via the relay terminal board 54.

The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) are pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 65. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when receiving the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, and when the game is replayed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button 18 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The determination switch 68 detects that the determination button 19 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. Then, the main control board 41 outputs the detection result output from the selection switch 67 or the determination switch 68 to the sub control board 42 as needed.

The sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78 are electrically connected to the sub-relay board 69. There is.

The sub-control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 69. Further, the sub-control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, and the rotating accessory control board 78 via the sub-relay board 69. ing.

The sound I / O board 71 outputs audio to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED substrate 72 causes the LED group 25, which shows a specific example of the light source, to emit light according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6), and displays the blinking pattern. The LED substrate 72 controls the LEDs provided on the LED group 25 that illuminates the waist panel 29 and the decorative member 7, and the rotating accessory 200.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 stores the open / close history of the front door 2b. Further, when the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error to the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

The rotating accessory control board 78 drives the rotating accessory 200 according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6). The rotating accessory 200 is driven and controlled by the rotating accessory control board 78 to rotationally drive the eyeball member 205, which will be described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 and the rotating accessory control board 78 constitute the accessory control means, and the eyeball member 205 is the rotating accessory according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101. It is driven and controlled by the control board 78.

The ROM cartridge board 76, the liquid crystal relay board 77, and the panel control board 79 are connected to the sub-control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image (video) for production, audio, light (LED group 25), driving and communication data of the rotating accessory 200. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

The panel control board 79 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the LED 403 constituting the panel device 400, and uses the panel device 400 to execute a plurality of types of illumination display. The panel control board 79 is configured with a drive circuit for inputting data that is the basis of the light emission mode from the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 6) of the sub control board 42, and outputs an LED control signal to the LED 403. Images corresponding to the latent image 402 are displayed on the panel device 400 in various aspects.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the main control circuit 91 as the main control unit controls the progress of the game with the microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as the main component.

The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95. The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and is provided at a predetermined position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 101 as a sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and the effect content is determined and executed based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. In addition to performing such processes, peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the rotating accessory 200, various LEDs, the speakers 23L, and 23R are controlled.

The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106. The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light and the drive of the rotating accessory 200 according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area. A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area.

For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a bonus control task for controlling the rotating accessory 200, a lamp control task for controlling the light output from the LED light source, and the like. A voice control task for controlling sound output by the speakers 23L and 23R is included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub RAM 103 is configured to include a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as a work area and a SRAM (Static RAM) for backup, and when the power is turned on, various data stored in the SRAM are copied to the DRAM to form a sub control circuit. Various information used in 101 is restored to the contents at the time of power off.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the sub CPU 102 drives the rotating accessory 200 based on the accessory movable data specified by the effect content.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Structure of rotating accessory>
Next, the rotating accessory 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 7 to 16. The rotating accessory 200 of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory 200 of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 2, the rotating accessory 200 is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1 with respect to the display device 10. The rotating accessory 200 includes a cover member 198 that can be opened and closed up and down. The cover member 198 constitutes the movable portion of the present invention. Further, in front of the cover member 198, a transparent lens 199 (not shown) is provided so that the rotating accessory 200 is not directly touched by the player.

When the cover member 198 is opened, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotating accessory 200 is exposed as shown in FIG. Further, when the cover member 198 is closed, the eyeball main body 203 of the rotating accessory 200 becomes invisible to the player. The rotating accessory 200 is an accessory (gimmick) that imitates the eyes, the cover member 198 corresponds to the eyelid, and the eyeball body 203 corresponds to the eyeball. Further, the cover member 198 is opened and closed up and down by an actuator such as a motor (not shown).

In FIGS. 7 to 9, the rotating accessory 200 includes an upper base 202, an eyeball main body 203, and a lower base 204.

The eyeball main body 203 is provided at the eyeball member 205 extending in the left-right direction of the pachislot 1, the left eye corner member 206 provided at one end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction, and the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. It is provided with the right outer corner member 207. The rotation direction and the left-right direction of the eyeball member 205 are the rotation direction and the left-right direction as seen from the player.

The eyeball member 205 is formed in a hemispherical shape having an arcuate surface 205A along the extending direction, and an image 205a imitating an eyeball is formed on the arcuate surface 205A. The eyeball member 205 is rotatable in the left-right direction along the arcuate surface 205A. Further, the eyeball member 205 is composed of a lens.

When the left eye corner member 206 and the right eye corner member 207 are not engaged with the eyeball member 205, respectively, the eyeball member 205, the left eye corner member 206, and the right eye corner member 207 are arranged at overlapping positions. Further, the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are provided so as to overlap each other behind the eyeball member 205 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the rear ends of the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are located behind the rear end in the width direction of the eyeball member 205.

The front ends of the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are installed in front of the eyeball member 205 so as to cover both ends in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205, and can rotate relative to the eyeball member 205. It has become. Engagement protrusions 206A and 207A are formed on the back surfaces of the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, an engaging projection 205B is formed at one end (left end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engaging protrusion 205B can be engaged with the engaging protrusion 206A formed on the back surface of the left outer corner member 206.

An engaging projection 205C is formed at the other end (right end) of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction. The engaging projection 205C can engage with the engaging projection 207A formed on the back surface of the right outer corner member 207.

The engaging projection 206A of the left outer corner member 206 is located inward in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engaging projection 205B of the eyeball member 205. As a result, when the eyeball member 205 rotates to the right, which is one side of the rotation direction, the engaging projection 205B engages with the engaging projection 206A. After that, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates to the right, the left outer corner member 206 moves to the right together with the eyeball member 205.

The engaging projection 207A of the right outer corner member 207 is located inward in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engaging projection 205C of the eyeball member 205. As a result, when the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left, which is the other side in the rotation direction, the engaging projection 205C engages with the engaging projection 207A. After that, when the eyeball member 205 further rotates to the left, the right outer corner member 207 moves to the left together with the eyeball member 205.

As shown in FIG. 10, a projecting plate 208 is provided on the back surface of the eyeball member 205, and the projecting plate 208 projects rearward from the back surface of the eyeball member 205. Three boss portions 208A (only the central boss portion 208A is shown in FIG. 10) are erected on the upper surface of the projecting plate 208.

A bush 209A is rotatably attached to the boss portion 208A with respect to the boss portion 208A. The bush 209A is secured to the boss portion 208A by the screw 209C via the washer 209B.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper base 202 includes a base main body 210 extending in the left-right direction and a semicircular portion 211 projecting forward from the base main body 210. A guide groove 210A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the base main body 210, and a rack member 212 is inserted into the guide groove 210A so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

A rack tooth 212A is formed at the right end of the rack member 212, and a relay gear 213 meshes with the rack tooth 212A. The relay gear 213 is rotatably supported by the base body 210, and the relay gear 213 meshes with the output gear 214A of the motor 214. The motor 214 is driven by the rotating accessory control board 78.

The motor 214 is supported by the base body 210 and rotates the output gear 214A. When the output gear 214A rotates in the forward and reverse directions, the rack member 212 reciprocates in the left-right direction via the relay gear 213.

The rack member 212 is provided with a guide piece 212B, and the guide piece 212B projects forward from the rack member 212. The guide piece 212B is formed with an elongated hole 212b extending in the front-rear direction. A bush 209A attached to the boss portion 208A located at the center of the three boss portions 208A formed on the upper surface of the protruding plate 208 is slidably fitted into the elongated hole 212b.

The semicircular portion 211 is formed with a guide groove 211A that curves in the direction of rotation of the eyeball member 205, in other words, in the same direction as the direction along the arcuate surface 205A. The above-mentioned three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide groove 211A. Of the three bushes 209A, the central bush 209A is further fitted into the elongated hole 212b through the guide groove 211A.

As a result, when the rack member 212 moves in the left-right direction, the central bush 209A moves in the elongated hole 212b in the front-rear direction and moves along the guide groove 211A, so that the eyeball member 205 moves in the left-right direction. Rotate.

Engagement pieces 206B and 207B are formed on the upper portions of the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11 to 13, guide grooves 210B and 210C are formed in the base body 210, and the guide grooves 210B and 210C extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. There is. Engagement pieces 206B and 207B are engaged with the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are guided by the guide grooves 210B and 210C, respectively, and rotate in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 14 to 16, guide grooves 204A and 204B are formed in the lower base 204, and the guide grooves 204A and 204B extend in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205. doing.

A pair of bushes 215A and 215B are rotatably provided in the lower portion of the left outer corner member 206, and the bushes 215A and 215B are slidably fitted in the guide groove 204A. A pair of bushes 215C and 215D are rotatably provided in the lower portion of the right outer corner member 207, and the bushes 215C and 215D are slidably fitted in the guide groove 204B.

As a result, the engaging pieces 206B and 207B are guided to the guide grooves 210B and 210C of the upper base 202, and the bushes 215A, 215B, 215C and 215D are guided to the guide grooves 204A and 204B of the lower base 204. The left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are stably moved in the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

In FIGS. 7 and 8, the left outer corner member 216 and the right outer corner member 217 are fixed to the lower base 204. The left outer corner member 216 and the right outer corner member 217 are located in front of the movable left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207, and the left outer corner member 206 and the right outer corner member 207 are in a state where the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position. It covers a part of the front from the front. The state in which the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position is a state in which the image 205a imitating the eyeball of the eyeball member 205 faces the front as shown in FIGS. 8, 11, and 14.

In the state where the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position, the left outer corner member 216 covers the left half of the left outer corner member 206. On the other hand, the right half of the left outer corner member 206 is not covered by the left outer corner member 216 and can be seen from the front. The right outer corner member 217 covers the right half of the right outer corner member 207. On the other hand, the left half of the right outer corner member 207 is not covered by the right outer corner member 217 and can be seen from the front.

In FIGS. 7 and 14, one end of the wire 218 is attached to the bush 215A of the left outer corner member 206, and the other end of the wire 218 is attached to one end of the coil spring 219. The other end of the coil spring 219 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 219 urges the left outer corner member 206 in the left direction, which is the other direction of the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

A pulley 220 is provided between the coil spring 219 and the left outer corner member 206, the pulley 220 is in sliding contact with the wire 218, and the coil spring 219 is lateral to one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. The wire 218 is bent so as to be located on the left side).

One end of the wire 221 is attached to the bush 215C of the right outer corner member 207, and the other end of the wire 221 is attached to one end of the coil spring 222. The other end of the coil spring 222 is attached to the lower base 204, and the coil spring 222 urges the right outer corner member 207 in the right direction, which is one direction of the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205.

A pulley 223 is provided between the coil spring 222 and the right outer corner member 207, the pulley 223 is in sliding contact with the wire 221 and the coil spring 222 is lateral to one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205. The wire 221 is bent so as to be located on the right side).

Here, the rotating accessory 200 is provided with an LED substrate (not shown) including a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and the LED substrate is provided behind the eyeball member 205. The eyeball member 205 is irradiated from the rear by the LED, and the light illuminated on the eyeball member 205 is irradiated to the front of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the lens 199.

In the rotating accessory 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, when the output gear 214A is rotated in the counterclockwise rotation direction by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position, the output gear 214A is rotated in the counterclockwise rotation direction via the relay gear 213. The rack member 212 moves to the right. At this time, as shown in FIG. 12, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the elongated hole 212b is pressed to the right by the guide piece 212B.

Since the three bushes 209A are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 211A formed in the semicircular portion 211, when the central bush 209A is pressed to the right by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 It rotates to the right along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

The guide groove 211A is curved in the same direction as the rotation direction of the eyeball member 205, and the three bushes 209A move to the right along the curved guide groove 211A. The central bush 209A is slidably fitted in the elongated hole 212b of the guide piece 212B of the rack member 212, and the elongated hole 212b extends along the front-rear direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, so that there are three. When the bush 209A moves to the right along the guide groove 211A, the central bush 209A slides in the front-rear direction along the elongated hole 212b, so that the eyeball member 205 smoothly rotates along the guide groove 211A. ..

When the eyeball member 205 moves to the right, the engagement projection 206A of the left outer corner member 206 engages with the engagement projection 205B formed at one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 (FIGS. 12 and 13). (See), the left outer corner member 206 moves to the right together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping the one end in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 behind the eyeball member 205.

When the left outer corner member 206 moves to the right, the wire 218 pulls the coil spring 219 from the moment when the engaging protrusion 205B engages with the engaging protrusion 206A (state in FIG. 15) as shown in FIG. The coil spring 219 extends to urge the left outer corner member 206 to the left.

Since the engaging projection 206A of the left outer corner member 206 is located inward in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engaging projection 205B of the eyeball member 205, the left outer corner member 206 is located in the right direction together with the eyeball member 205. Even if it is movable, the left outer corner member 206 is not pulled by the coil spring 219 and pulled back to the left. In this way, the eyeball member 205 moves to the right. 9, 13, and 14 show a state in which the eyeball member 205 has moved to the maximum moving position in the right direction.

When the output gear 214A is rotated in the clockwise direction by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is moved to the maximum moving position in the right direction, the rack member 212 is moved to the left via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed to the left by the guide piece 212B.

When the central bush 209A is pressed to the left by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left toward the neutral position, the left outer corner member 206 moves to the left together with the eyeball member 205 by being pulled by the coil spring 219. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum moving position in the right direction to the neutral position, the left outer corner member 206 returns to the initial position. The state in which the eyeball member 205 moves from the right direction toward the neutral position is shown in the order of FIGS. 13 (16), 12 (15), and 11 (14).

When the output gear 214A is rotated in the clockwise direction by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is located in the neutral position, the rack member 212 moves to the left via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) fitted in the elongated hole 212b is pressed to the left by the guide piece 212B.

When the central bush 209A is pressed to the left by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates to the left along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A.

When the three bushes 209A move to the left along the guide groove 211A, the central bush 209A slides in the front-rear direction along the elongated hole 212b so that the eyeball member 205 smoothly moves along the guide groove 211A. Rotate.

Further, when the eyeball member 205 moves to the left, the engagement projection 207A of the right outer corner member 207 engages with the engagement projection 205C formed at the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction, whereby the eyeball member 205 Behind the 205, the right outer corner member 207 moves to the left together with the eyeball member 205 while overlapping with the other end of the eyeball member 205 in the extending direction.

When the right outer corner member 207 moves to the left, the wire 221 pulls the coil spring 222, so that the coil spring 222 extends and urges the right outer corner member 207 to the right. Since the engaging projection 207A of the right outer corner member 207 is located inward in the extending direction of the eyeball member 205 with respect to the engaging projection 205C of the eyeball member 205, the right outer corner member 207 is located in the left direction together with the eyeball member 205. Even if it is movable, the right outer corner member 207 is not pulled by the coil spring 222 and pulled back to the right. In this way, the eyeball member 205 moves to the left.

When the output gear 214A is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 214 from the state where the eyeball member 205 is moved to the maximum movement position in the left direction, the rack member 212 is moved to the right via the relay gear 213. At this time, the central bush 209A (see FIG. 7) is pressed to the right by the guide piece 212B.

When the central bush 209A is pressed to the right by the guide piece 212B, the eyeball member 205 rotates to the right along the guide groove 211A via the three bushes 209A. When the eyeball member 205 rotates to the right toward the neutral position, the right outer corner member 207 is pulled by the coil spring 219 and moves to the right together with the eyeball member 205. When the eyeball member 205 rotates from the maximum moving position in the left direction to the neutral position, the right outer corner member 207 returns to the initial position.

In this way, the eyeball member 205 rotates between the right direction and the left direction through the neutral position, so that it is possible to produce an effect as if the eyeball moves in the left-right direction.

[Transition flow of game state on the main side]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 manages the game state based on the winning / non-operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 17, the main control circuit 91 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (BB). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Further, the main control circuit 91 provides six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT3 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state are the gaming states in which the winning combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and is the most advantageous gaming state among the bonus non-winning states.

The main control circuit 91 is an RT0 game that is distinguished based on the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state, which are distinguished based on the winning / not operating of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. The game state of the main side in the pachislot machine 1 is managed from the state to the RT5 game state. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has, as the gaming state in the pachislot 1, the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the bonus non-winning state. RT3 game state, RT4 game state in bonus non-winning state, RT5 game state in inter-flag state, RT0 game state in bonus state, RT2 game state in bonus state, RT4 game state in bonus state, and RB game state in bonus state It manages 10 types of states.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when the data 1 is stored in the bit 2 of the internal winning combination storage area 4, it means that the bonus is won. Further, the presence / absence of the bonus operation and the RT game state are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62 described later) provided in the main RAM 95. For example, when the data 1 is stored in the bits 3 and 5 of the game state flag storage area, the bonus (BB game state) is activated and the RT4 game state is set.

RT0 game state in the bonus non-winning state (data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 are 0, and data of all bits of the game state flag storage area is 0). Is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, from the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the inter-flag state. There is a possibility of shifting to the RT5 game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when (1) a combination of symbols related to a bell spill or an RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state is displayed. Shifts to the RT1 game state of. The bell spilled stitch is a combination of symbols displayed when the push order bell, which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination, and the push order determined for each type of push order bell is incorrect. Further, the RT1 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the push order lip, which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination, and the push order determined for each type of push order lip is incorrect.

Further, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (2) When the combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The RT4 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when the push order lip described later is determined as an internal winning combination, and the push order determined for each type of push order lip is correct, or a combination of symbols described later. It is a combination of symbols displayed when "F_chance lip 2" or "F_slip chance lip 2" is determined as an internal winning combination.

Further, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination of the symbols related to (3) RT3 transition lip is displayed, the game shifts to the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols displayed when "F_slip chance lip 1" or "F_cherry lip", which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination.

Further, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. The role related to BB is any one of "F_black black black", "F_red red red", "F_white white white", "F_red red white", and "F_white white red" described later. These BB combinations are carried over as internal winning combinations until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (that is, until the operation of the BB starts) when the internal winning combination is determined, that is, so-called carry-over. It is a role.

Subsequently, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and data of bit 0 of the game state flag storage area). 1) is one of the basic gaming states during the bonus non-winning state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT1 game state in the bonus non-winning state, (4) when the fixed number of games (5 games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 game in the bonus non-winning state Move to the state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

Further, the RT2 game state in the bonus non-winning state (the data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and the data of bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and the data of bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is 0. 1) is a gaming state in which there is a possibility of transition after the operation of the BB is completed. In the present embodiment, at the end of the bonus, the RT gaming state in the bonus state is maintained and the state shifts to the bonus non-winning state. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state will shift when the bonus state ends in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state may shift to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, (1) when the combination of symbols related to the bell spilled eyes is displayed, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is displayed. Move to. Further, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

Further, the data of the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (the data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and the data of bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 are 0, and the data of the bit 2 of the game state flag storage area is 0. 1) is a gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is more likely to be determined as the internal winning combination than in the RT0 gaming state, which is the basic gaming state of the pachislot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT3 game state in the bonus non-winning state, (4) when the fixed number of games (5 games in the present embodiment) elapses, the RT0 game in the bonus non-winning state Move to the state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

Further, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (the data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and the data of bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and the data of the bit 3 of the game state flag storage area is 0. 1) is an advantageous state in which the winning combination is most likely to be determined as the internal winning combination and the game can be played without reducing the number of medals. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state may shift to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when (1) a combination of symbols related to the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the bonus non-winning state is displayed. Shifts to the RT1 game state of. Further, in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, when the combination related to (5) BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

Further, the data of any of the RT5 gaming states in the inter-flag state (bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 1 and bit 4 of the game state flag storage area is 1. The data 1) is between the so-called BB flags in which the combination related to the BB is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the game of staying until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the BB carried over as the internal winning combination is displayed. It is in a state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state may shift to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RT5 game state in the inter-flag state, (6) a combination of symbols according to the carried-over BB is displayed, and when the BB is activated, RT0 in the bonus state is displayed. It shifts to the game state.

The RT0 game state in the bonus state (the data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and the data of bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and the data of bit 5 of the game state flag storage area is 1) is When the BB is activated, it is the first game state to stay. During the bonus state, the game starts from the RT0 game state in the bonus state and shifts to other game states. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the operation of (10) BB is completed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the state shifts to the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the end of the bonus). The RT game state is maintained). The operation of BB ends when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 59.

Further, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, when the combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. The combination related to JACIN is any one of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", and "F_JACIN3" described later. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 described later, in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, there is a high probability that the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination (about 52%), so that the operation of BB is basically activated. Before the end, the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, and the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. These JACIN winning combinations will be used as internal winning combinations only during the bonus state until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (that is, until the RB operation starts) when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a so-called carry-over role that is carried over.

Further, in the RT4 game state in the bonus state (data of bits 1 to 3 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and data of bits 3 and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area is 1), the combination related to JACIN is used. It is between the so-called RB flags in the bonus state, which is carried over as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RB gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the operation of (10) BB is completed in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state, the state shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (before and after the end of the bonus). The RT game state is maintained). Further, in the RT4 game state in the bonus state, (8) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried-over JACIN is displayed, and when the RB is activated, the game shifts to the RB game state in the bonus state.

Further, the data of the RB game state in the bonus state (data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and bits 5 and 6 of the game state flag storage area are 0. The data of 1) is a gaming state in which the RB shifts when the operation of the RB starts during the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 33, which will be described later, in the RB game state in the bonus state, there is a high probability (about 65%) that "out of place" is determined as the internal winning combination, which is basically a disadvantageous state. In the form of pachislot 1, during the bonus state, the game is played while maintaining the RT4 game state in the bonus state without displaying the combination of symbols according to the carried-over JACIN.

As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RB gaming state in the bonus state shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the RB game state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the state shifts to the RT2 game state in the bonus non-winning state. Further, in the RB game state in the bonus state, when the operation of (9) RB is completed, the state shifts to the RT2 game state in the bonus state. As for the operation of the RB, the combination of symbols other than "missing" is displayed 8 times in the RB game state in the bonus state (8 wins), and 12 games are performed in the RB game state in the bonus state. It ends when either that or the operation of BB ends is satisfied.

Further, the RT2 game state in the bonus state (data of bits 2 to 7 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 and bits 0 to 3 of the internal winning combination storage area 5 is 0, and bits 1 and bit 5 of the game state flag storage area are 0. The data of 1) is a gaming state that shifts after the RB gaming state in the bonus state. As shown in FIG. 17, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state in the bonus state, when the operation of (10) BB is completed, the operation shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (the RT gaming state is maintained before and after the end of the bonus). Further, in the RT2 game state in the bonus state, when the combination related to (7) JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 game state in the bonus state. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT control means, and based on the determined internal winning combination, the RT gaming state is between the RT0 gaming state and the RT5 gaming state according to the respective transition conditions. To migrate.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 37.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 21 symbol positions "0" to "20" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "white 7", "red 7", "BAR", "rip 1", "rip 2", "rip 3", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "watermelon" and "watermelon". Includes "bell".

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 19, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C, and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 19, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 19 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "red 7", "BAR", "rip 1", "rip 2", "rip 3", "cherry 1", as described above. There are 10 types of "cherry 2", "watermelon" and "bell".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "red 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "BAR" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each of the "Rip 1", "Rip 2", "Rip 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2", "Watermelon" and "Bell" symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10). "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 32. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 95 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when the combination of symbols displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R matches the symbol combination (combination) specified in the symbol combination table along the winning line. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the re-game, and operating the bonus game. If the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the winning line. Specifically, in the data column, "storage area (data for designating a display combination storage area (see FIG. 61) described later)" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and the storage area The stored "data (data for designating bits according to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" is specified. In this embodiment, the combination of each symbol is determined by using 45 1-byte storage areas. For example, the “R_RT shift A_01” shown in FIG. 20 is determined by storing 1 in bit 0 of the display combination storage area 1.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the winning line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 30, when the combination “C_CD bell” is displayed, 10 medals will be paid out.

In this embodiment, a large number of combinations of symbols shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 are classified into a plurality of types according to their roles. The role type column in the symbol combination table defines the role of each symbol combination. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a large number of combinations of symbols are classified into six types: "RT transition eye", "BB", "JACIN", "re-game", "RT transition re-game", and "winning".

The role type "RT transition" is a combination of symbols that shifts the RT game state when displayed, and corresponds to "R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition F_08" shown in FIG. .. These "RT transition stitches" are a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order determined for each type of push order bell described above, and are the above-mentioned "bell spilled stitches". That is, if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination and the answer is incorrect in the push order, one of the combinations of symbols corresponding to the combination type "RT transition" may be displayed. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "RT transition eye" is displayed, there is a possibility of transition to the RT1 gaming state.

The combination type "BB" is a combination of symbols in which the BB is operated when displayed, and corresponds to "C_BB1" to "C_BB5_02" shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "BB" is displayed, the operation of BB starts and the game shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

The combination type "JACIN" is a combination of symbols in which the RB is operated when displayed, and corresponds to "C_JACIN1" to "C_JACIN3" shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "JACIN" is displayed, the operation of the RB starts, and after the operation of the RB ends, the game shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

The role type "re-game" is a combination of symbols in which the re-game is activated when displayed, and corresponds to "C_CU white" to "C_KY lip_09" shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "re-game" is displayed, the re-game is activated. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "re-game" is displayed, the RT game state is not changed.

The role type "RT transition re-game" is a combination of symbols that may shift the RT game state at the same time as the re-game is activated when displayed, and is a "C_CU lip" shown in FIGS. 22 to 28. _01 "to" C_Sui FKF_18 "corresponds. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "RT transition re-game" is displayed, the re-game is activated, and there is a possibility of shifting to various RT game states according to the combination of symbols.

For example, when "C_CU rip_01" to "C_CU rip_03" shown in FIG. 22 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. These "C_CU rip_01" to "C_CU rip_03" are a combination of symbols that may be displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order determined for each type of push order rip described above, and are the above-mentioned "RT1". "Transition lip". That is, if the push order rip is determined as the internal winning combination and the push order is incorrect, one of "C_CU rip_01" to "C_CU rip_03" will be displayed.

Further, when "C_C Lip 01" to "C_Bell FKC_12" shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT4 gaming state. These "C_C rip 01" to "C_bell FKC_12" are the above-mentioned "RT4 transition rip". More specifically, if the above-mentioned push order rip is determined as an internal winning combination and the answer is correct in the push order, one of "C_CU rip_01" to "C_CU rip_03" will be displayed. Further, when the above-mentioned "F_chance lip 2" or "F_slip chance lip 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of "C_C lip 01" to "C_bell FKC_12" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. It will be.

Further, when "C_CD Chelip A_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" shown in FIGS. 25 to 28 are displayed, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 gaming state. These "C_CD chelip A_01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" are the above-mentioned "RT3 transition lip". More specifically, when the above-mentioned "F_slip chance lip 1" or "F_cherry lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, any one of "C_CD chelip A_01" to "C_sui FKF_18" is used regardless of the pressing order. It will be displayed.

The role type "winning" is a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out when displayed, and corresponds to "C_CD watermelon" to "C_B bell BB_04" shown in FIGS. 29 to 32. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning" is displayed, the number of medals specified in the payout number column of the symbol combination table will be paid out. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning" is displayed, the RT game state is not changed.

The “C_CD bell” shown in FIG. 30 is a combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is given in the push order determined for each type of push order bell described above. In addition, among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the role type "winning", the combination of symbols with the number of payouts "3" is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order determined for each push order bell type described above. It is a combination of possible symbols. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the push order determined for each push order bell type, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the role type "winning" and the number of payouts "3" or the role type "RT transition" The combination of symbols corresponding to "eyes" will be displayed. In Pachislot 1, there are 6 possible push orders for the stop operation. Therefore, the symbol combination to be displayed when the push order is incorrect can be arbitrarily set from the 5 push orders of the incorrect answer. be able to.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information for the data pointer corresponding to the winning combination. In the above-mentioned RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the "RT0" column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to non-bonus winning. In the winning RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery values defined in the "RT1" to "RT4" columns of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT5 game state in the inter-flag state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value defined in the "RT5" column of the internal lottery table. Further, in the RT0 game state in the bonus state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the "BB (RT0)" column of the internal lottery table, and similarly, the RT4 game state or bonus in the bonus state. In the RT2 game state in the state, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the "BB (RT4)" or "BB (RT2)" column of the internal lottery table, and the RB game state in the bonus state. Then, the internal winning combination is determined using the lottery value specified in the "in BB (RB)" column of the internal lottery table.

The internal lottery table basically changes the type of the winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT gaming state, and depends on whether or not the bonus (BB or RB) is activated. The type and winning probability of the winning combination (other than the replay and carry-over winning combination) determined as the internal winning combination will change.

The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is data used for determining the storage area type and 1-byte data. As the data pointer, a small winning combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of the plurality of winning numbers.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning combination, and whether or not the subtraction result is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which it is assigned (that is, the dake pointer) will be determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 38 to 56 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in each internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the winning line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, in the winning combination, the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed on the winning line is not shown in the correspondence table (for example, in the winning combination “F_black black black” shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 39 and later. Since the combination of symbols shown in is not displayable, the correspondence table is omitted).

With reference to FIG. 38, for example, when the winning combination “F_black black black” is the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination name “C_BB1” can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. Referring to FIG. 21, the combination name “C_BB1” is a combination of symbols in which “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed along the winning line. It should be noted that the correspondence table shown in the figure does not specify the case where the winning combination is "out of order", but this is a combination of all the symbols specified by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 32. Indicates that the display of is not permitted.

In the pachislot machine 1, the main control circuit 91 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the game state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 38 to 56 is shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 38 to 56, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the main control circuit 91 stops the combination. Since the control differs depending on not only the internal winning combination but also the current gaming state, even a combination of symbols marked with a circle corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

<Outline of the winning role>
This point will be described in detail with reference to the outline of the winning combination shown in FIGS. 57 and 58. As shown in FIG. 57, when "out of place" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of all the symbol combinations defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is not permitted. In the RT4 gaming state where the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, the probability that "missing" is determined as the internal winning combination decreases as the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay increases. Therefore, in the following, the "missing" in the RT4 gaming state may be used as a rare role (treated as a so-called "pure losing").

In addition, when any of "F_black black black", "F_red red red", "F_white white white", "F_red red white", and "F_white white red" is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIG. 38 Display of related symbol combinations is allowed. If any of "F_black black-black", "F_red-red-red", "F_white-white-white", "F_red-red-white", and "F_white-white-red" is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above. The gaming state is the RT5 gaming state between flags.

Further, when any one of "F_maintenance lip 1" and "F_maintenance lip 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is permitted. In addition, even if the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed for "F_maintenance lip 1" and "F_maintenance lip 2", the RT game state is not changed.

Further, "F_123 rip" to "F_2nd rip" are the above-mentioned push order rips, and when any of these push order rips is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is established. Display of a combination of symbols is allowed. More specifically, when the correct answer is in the push order determined for each push order lip type, the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (FIGS. 22 to 22) among the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. 39 to 43. When the display of the combination of symbols according to (see FIG. 24) is permitted and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, the above-mentioned RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) among the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. 39 to 43. ) Is permitted to display the combination of symbols.

In addition, the name of the winning combination as the push order lip is determined based on the push order that is the correct answer. For example, "1" named "F_123 Lip" indicates that the stop operation is "left", "2" indicates that the stop operation is "middle", and "3" indicates that the stop operation is "right". It shows that it is. Then, "123" indicates the correct push order. In the case of "F_123 lip", the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right". If is, the answer is correct, and if the push order is other than that, the answer is incorrect. Similarly, in the case of "F_231 lip", the correct answer is when the first stop operation is "middle", the second stop operation is "right", and the third stop operation is "left", and in the case of other push orders. Indicates that the answer is incorrect. Further, "F_2nd lip" indicates that the answer is correct when the first stop operation is "medium", and is incorrect when the first stop operation is in any other push order.

Returning to FIG. 57, "F_123 upper 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 alignment" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_123 upper 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 alignment" are the above-mentioned push order rips, and when the push order is correct, the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43. Of the combinations of symbols having the above, the display of the combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) is permitted, and when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, the correspondence shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is displayed. Among the combinations of symbols to have, the display of the combinations of symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned RT1 transition lip (see FIG. 22) is permitted.

On the other hand, in the bonus state, "F_123 upper 7 ten" to "F_2nd cross 7 assortment" are "F_123 upper 7 ten" among the combinations of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02" shown in FIG. "F_2nd cross 7 alignment" and the display of the combination of the symbols corresponding to each other are permitted. Here, the combination of the symbols of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02" is a pseudo line other than the winning line among the lines connecting the upper, middle and lower stages of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R in a straight line. This is a combination of symbols in which three or two "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols are displayed on the line. In the following, a combination of symbols in which any of three "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols is displayed may be referred to as a "7-matched lip", and a "white 7" symbol or "red 7" A combination of symbols in which two of the symbols are displayed may be referred to as a "7 fanning lip". Of the combination names "C_CU white" to "C_B white_02", the combination of symbols that do not have "FK (fake)" in the combination name is "7-match lip", and the combination name is "FK (fake)". The combination of the symbols marked with is "7 free-kick lip". The lines connecting the upper, middle and lower tiers of each reel 3L, 3C and 3R in a straight line are the top line connecting the upper tiers, the center line connecting the middle tiers, the bottom line connecting the lower tiers, and the cross-down line connecting the lower tiers. There are 5 types of cross-up lines that connect to the right, but since the winning line is a cross-down line, "7-matched rip" or "7-fan rip" is 4 pseudo lines other than the cross-down line. Three or two "white 7" symbols or "red 7" symbols will be displayed along any of the above.

With reference to the correspondence shown in FIG. 39, in the bonus state, the display of "7 fanning lip" is permitted for "F_123 upper 7 ten" and "F_132 lower 7 ten". Further, in the bonus state, the display of "7-aligned lip" is permitted for "F_312 upper 7-aligned" to "F_2nd cross 7-aligned".

Further, "F_J1 upper 7 lip", "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J1 upper 7 rips", "F_J1 lower 7 rips" and "F_J1 cross 7 rips" are the above-mentioned RT4 transition rips (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. ) Is permitted to display the combination of symbols. In the bonus non-winning state, "F_J1 upper 7 rips", "F_J1 lower 7 rips" and "F_J1 cross 7 rips" are determined as internal winning combinations only in the RT4 game state, so that in the bonus non-winning state, , "F_J1 upper 7 rip", "F_J1 lower 7 rip" and "F_J1 cross 7 rip" are determined as internal winning combinations, the RT4 gaming state will be maintained.

On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of "F_J1 upper 7 rip", "F_J1 lower 7 rip" and "F_J1 cross 7 rip" differs depending on the type of the combination related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN1" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either "F_J1 upper 7 rip", "F_J1 lower 7 rip" or "F_J1 cross 7 rip" and "F_JACIN1" ”),“ F_J1 upper 7 rips ”,“ F_J1 lower 7 rips ”and“ F_J1 cross 7 rips ”are“ 7-matched rips ”other than the cross down line. Three "white 7" symbols or three "red 7" symbols will be displayed along any of the four pseudo lines of.

On the other hand, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, "F_J1 upper 7 rip", "F_J1 lower 7 rip" or "F_J1 cross 7 rip" and " If either "F_JACIN2" or "F_JACIN3" is determined as the internal winning combination), "F_J1 upper 7 rips", "F_J1 lower 7 rips" and "F_J1 cross 7 rips" are "normal in bonus". It is a "rip", and a combination of symbols other than the "7-matched lip" among the combinations of symbols having a corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 39 to 43 is displayed.

The state in which "F_JACIN1" is carried over as the internal winning combination may be referred to as "between the JAC1 flags", and similarly, the state in which "F_JACIN2" is carried over as the internal winning combination is referred to as "between the JAC2 flags". The state in which "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination may be referred to as "between JAC3 flags".

Further, "F_J2 Chance Lip 1" to "F_J2 Cherry Lip" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip" are combinations of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In addition, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip" are determined as internal winning roles only in the RT4 game state, so in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J1 upper 7 lip", When "F_J1 lower 7 lip" and "F_J1 cross 7 lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

On the other hand, in the bonus state, the stop control of "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip" differs depending on the type of the combination related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN2" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either "F_J1 upper 7 rip", "F_J1 lower 7 rip" or "F_J1 cross 7 rip" and "F_JACIN2" ”),“ F_J2 chance lip 1 ”to“ F_J2 cherry lip ”is a“ chance lip ”, and the symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 44 to 50 Display of any combination of symbols "C_B Lip 01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" among the combinations is permitted.

On the other hand, in the bonus state, when "F_JACIN1" or "F_JACIN3" is carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, either "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip" and either "F_JACIN1" or "F_JACIN3" (When two of the heels are determined as the internal winning combination), "F_J2 chance lip 1" to "F_J2 cherry lip" are "normal lip in the bonus" and have the correspondence shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Among the combinations of symbols, combinations of symbols other than "Chance Lip" are displayed.

Further, "F_J3 Chance Lip 1" to "F_J3 Cherry Lip" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the game state. Specifically, in the bonus non-winning state, "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are combinations of symbols according to the above-mentioned RT4 transition lip (see FIGS. 22 to 24) regardless of the pressing order. Display is allowed. In the bonus non-winning state, "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 cherry lip" are determined as internal winning roles only in the RT4 game state, so "F_J3 chance lip 1" to "F_J3 chance lip 1" in the bonus non-winning state. When "F_J3 Cherry Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT4 gaming state will be maintained.

On the other hand, in the bonus state, "F_J3 Chance Lip 1" to "F_J3 Cherry Lip" are "Chance Lip" regardless of the type of the role related to JACIN carried over as the internal winning role, and are shown in FIGS. 44 to 50. Display of any combination of symbols "C_B Lip 01" to "C_Sui FKF_18" among the combinations of symbols having a corresponding relationship is permitted.

Further, when any one of "F_chance lip 1" to "F_common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 44 to 56 is permitted. The features such as the transition of the RT gaming state triggered by "F_Chance Lip 1" to "F_Common Bell" are as shown in FIG. 57.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 58, "F_123 bell A" to "F_321 bell D" are basically the push order bells described above, and one of these push order bells is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the display of the combination of symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted. More specifically, when the correct answer is in the push order determined for each push order bell type, "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)" among the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. It is allowed to display the combination of symbols according to. On the other hand, when the push order determined for each type of push order bell is incorrect, the symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned bell spills (see FIG. 20) among the combinations of symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. Or the combination of symbols whose payout number is "3" (see FIGS. 30 to 32) is permitted in the symbol combination table.

In addition, the name of the winning role as the push order bell is determined based on the push order that is the correct answer. For example, "1" named "F_123 Bell A" indicates that the stop operation is "left", "2" indicates that the stop operation is "middle", and "3" indicates that the stop operation is "middle". It shows that it is "right". Then, "123" indicates the pressing order that is the correct answer. In the case of "F_123 Bell A", the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right". If it is, the answer is correct, and if the push order is other than that, the answer is incorrect. Similarly, in the case of "F_231 Bell A", the correct answer is when the first stop operation is "middle", the second stop operation is "right", and the third stop operation is "left". It shows that the answer is incorrect in some cases.

Also, among the push order bells, "F_123 bell C", "F_123 bell D", "F_132 bell C", "F_132 bell D", "F_213 bell C", "F_213 bell D", "F_231 bell C", "F_231 bell D", and "F_312 bell". "C", "F_312 bell D", "F_321 bell C", and "F_321 bell D" are not only internal winning combinations but also winning combinations whose stop control differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, it is the above-mentioned push order bell between the non-flags (RT0 game state to RT4 game state in the bonus non-winning state), and when the push order is correct, the symbols having the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. When the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)" is permitted and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, among the combinations of the symbols having the corresponding relationships shown in FIGS. 51 to 56. It is permitted to display a combination of symbols according to the above-mentioned bell spills (see FIG. 20) or a combination of symbols having a payout number of "3" (see FIGS. 30 to 32) in the symbol combination table.

On the other hand, in the inter-flag state (RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state), "F_123 bell C" "F_123 bell D" "F_132 bell C" "F_132 bell D" "F_213 bell C" "F_213 bell D" "F_231 bell" "C", "F_231 bell D", "F_312 bell C", "F_312 bell D", "F_321 bell C", and "F_321 bell D" are combinations of symbols having a corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 regardless of the pressing order. The display of the combination of symbols corresponding to our "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)" is permitted.

Further, when any one of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", and "F_JACIN3" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. 38 is permitted. If any of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", and "F_JACIN3" is determined as the internal winning combination, the corresponding symbol combinations of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", and "F_JACIN3" determined as the internal winning combination are used. Until it is displayed (only during the bonus state), it will be carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, when any one of "F_RB combination A" and "F_RB combination B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the display of the combination of symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIGS. 51 to 56 is permitted.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
59 to 65 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 59 is composed of 45 storage areas of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45. The size of each storage area of these internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. Data determined based on the internal winning combination (data indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the internal winning combination) are stored in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 45. In the illustrated internal winning combination storage area, for example, bit 2 of the internal winning combination storage area 4 corresponds to "C_BB1" indicating a combination of symbols that can be stopped when the internal winning combination "F_black black black" is used. ..

<Carryover storage area>
The carry-over combination storage area shown in FIG. 60 is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, which is composed of two storage areas of carry-over combination storage areas 1 and 2. Data related to the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area.

For example, by storing "1" in bit 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 1, it can be determined that the combination name "C_BB1" is in a state of winning "F_black black black" that can be stopped. The state in which "1" is stored in bit 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 is held until the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination name "C_BB1" is displayed on the winning line.

That is, when "F_black black black" is won, in bit 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the winning line as a display combination, " The state in which "1" is stored is maintained. Maintaining the state in which "1" is stored in bit 2 from the unit game in which the bonus is won to the unit game in which the prize is won is called "carry-over". In addition, "F_black black black" "F_red red red" "F_white white white" "F_red red white" "F_white white red" "F_JACIN1" corresponding to the data (combination of symbols) stored in the carry-over combination storage area. "F_JACIN2" and "F_JACIN3" are referred to as "carry-over roles".

When the stop operation is performed by the player and each of the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storage area is initialized, but the carry-over combination storage area is not initialized. By doing so, the state of "carry-over" can be maintained.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 61 is composed of 45 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 45. The size of each storage area of these display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 1 byte.

Therefore, the total size of the display combination storage areas 1 to 45 is 45 bytes. In the display combination storage areas 1 to 45, data determined based on the data (storage area type) defined by each symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 32 is stored. The value of the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the display combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

In the illustrated display combination storage area, for example, bits 0 to bit 7 of the display combination storage area 1 correspond to "R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition C_01", respectively.

<Game status flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 62 stores a flag for identifying the game state managed by the main control circuit 91, and has a size of 1 byte.

Bits 0 to 6 of the game state flag storage area are set to "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state", "RT4 game state", "RT5 game state", "BB game state", and "RB game state", respectively. It corresponds.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 63 has a size of 1 byte. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, that is, valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, which can detect a stop operation by the player.

Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, the bits 3 and 7 are unused and "0" is stored.

Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 2.

Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 17L. When the left stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 17C. When the middle stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 17R. When the right stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

In the present embodiment, when the stop button is valid, it means that the stop operation can be detected. Further, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Press order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 64 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. The pressing order storage area has a size of 1 byte, bits 0 to 5 are used, bits 6 and 7 are unused, and "0" is stored.

Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order of "left-> middle-> right", and "1" is stored (on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is "left-> middle-> right". Similarly, when the pressing order is "left → right → middle", "1" is stored (on) in bit 1, and when the pressing order is "middle → left → right", bit 2 is "1". Is stored (on), "1" is stored (on) in bit 3 in the case of "middle → right → left", and "1" is stored in bit 4 in the case of "right → left → middle". (On), and in the case of "right-> middle-> left", "1" is stored (on) in bit 5.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 65 is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

In the symbol code storage area, data indicating a combination of symbols that may be displayed on the rotating reel is stored. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all the symbol combinations may be displayed, so that "1" is stored in all the corresponding bits of the symbol code storage area. The reel. After that, when the left reel 3L is stopped (reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to "0".

[Transition flow of game state on the sub side]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 manages the gaming state based on whether or not to notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. As shown in FIG. 66, the sub-control circuit 101 distinguishes between a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, and a bonus state. Here, the general gaming state is basically a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the ART gaming state is the gaming state. It is the most advantageous gaming state for the person. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the most advantageous ART gaming state.

The general gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state for the ART lottery on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 66, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the CZ are gaming states in which the transition probabilities to the ART gaming state are different, and the normal gaming state has the lowest transition probability to the ART gaming state. It is a gaming state in which the probability of transition to the ART gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 17) of the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state for the ART lottery on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state, the CZ, the high probability gaming state, and the bonus state.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery (A) to ART and CZ is performed, and in this transition lottery, when the transition to (A1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 101 is in the normal gaming state. Shifts the game state from to the ART game state. Further, in this transition lottery, when the transition to (A2) CZ is won, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ. The details of the transition lottery (A) during the normal gaming state will be described later, but in the normal gaming state, the transition to ART and CZ occurs at two timings, one at the start of reel rotation and the other at the reel stop during one game. Lottery (A) is performed.

Further, in the normal gaming state, a lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability gaming state is also performed. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is shifted by controlling the gaming state on the main side, the transition to the high probability gaming state in the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is drawn (B). Is done. When the transition lottery (B) is won, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. The details of the transition lottery (B) during the normal game state will be described later, but in this transition lottery, the combination related to the replay in the RT4 game state in the bonus non-winning state, which is the sub-side normal game state, is used as the internal winning combination. A transition lottery (B) is performed based on the determined number of times.

Further, in the normal game state, (6) a combination of symbols corresponding to the carried-over BB is displayed, and when the BB is activated, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the bonus state. Since the transition to the bonus state is common to the main side and the sub side, detailed description thereof will be omitted below.

Subsequently, the CZ is a gaming state corresponding to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states (see FIG. 17) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state in the ART lottery on the sub side. CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high probability of shifting to the ART gaming state, and a maximum of 30 games are continued. The CZ is a so-called complete-run type chance zone, and when the CZ continues for a maximum of 30 games, the ART transition is confirmed. On the other hand, during CZ, a lottery for transition to ART is performed, and when this transition lottery is "maintained", CZ ends. Here, even if the transition lottery is "maintained", if the transition lottery is won, the transition to ART is performed, but it is more advantageous if the CZ continues for 30 games. Since there is a possibility of shifting to the ART game state, basically, during CZ, the game is played without receiving the transition lottery, and if the transition lottery is performed, the transition lottery is "invalid". By playing the game so as to be, it is hoped that 30 games will be continued without the end of CZ. The "maintenance / invalidity" of the transition lottery during CZ will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state. Specifically, when (C1) is won in the transition lottery (C) to ART performed during CZ, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state, and in this transition lottery, ( C2) If not won, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state.

Subsequently, the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is a non-winning gaming state in the ART lottery on the sub side. This is the gaming state in which the lottery (B) for shifting to the high-probability gaming state during the normal gaming state is won. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state.

Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, a transition lottery (D) to ART is performed, and in this transition lottery, when the transition to (D1) ART is won, the sub-control circuit 101 is in a high-probability gaming state. Shifts the gaming state from to the ART gaming state. The details of the transition lottery (D) in the high-probability gaming state will be described later, but basically, as in the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state, the reel rotation starts during one game and the reels. The transition lottery (D) to ART is performed at the two timings when the game is stopped. The transition lottery (D) in the high-probability gaming state has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART than the transition lottery (A) in the normal gaming state.

Further, the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and the control of the main side shifts from the (E) RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. When the control is performed, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won).

Here, as described above, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side is the case where the push order lip is correctly answered in the RT0 gaming state (normal gaming state on the sub side) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side. It is a game state to shift. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, which is the most basic gaming state (= disadvantageous to the player), when the correct answer is given to the push order lip, the pachislot 1 is shifted to the high probability gaming state and the game is started to ART. Favor the transition. In other words, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, a penalty such as not performing the ART transition lottery is given. Instead, it puts it in an advantageous state for the player. As a result, in pachislot 1, the RT4 gaming state in which the bonus non-winning state that has not won the ART transition lottery can be changed to the transition chance section to the ART gaming state, and the bonus non-bonus without the privilege of ART is attached. It is possible to enhance the interest of the RT4 game state in the winning state.

In addition, for the player, if the correct answer is given in the push order in the normal gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the high-probability gaming state, which is the transition chance section to the ART gaming state. Therefore, a strategy for the stop operation in the normal gaming state. The sex is increased, and the interest during the normal game state can be enhanced. That is, in the game property in which the gaming state accidentally shifted due to the player's stop operation is set as the penalty section, the stop operation during the normal game state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed on the left reel so as not to receive a penalty. You have to do it for, etc.). In this respect, as in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the transition lottery to ART without imposing a penalty, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state, and the normal game state. Not only the playability inside but also the operability can be improved.

By the way, if the game state accidentally shifted by the stop operation is set as the transition chance section to the ART game state instead of the penalty section, the profit on the player side and the profit on the game store side so as not to give an excessive profit to the player. It is necessary to adjust the balance with. There are many possible ways to adjust the balance. For example, there is an adjustment method that makes it easier to win the transition lottery compared to the normal gaming state while setting it as a transition chance section to the ART gaming state. In the method, the meaning of the transition chance section is diminished. In this respect, as shown in FIG. 17, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state of a fixed number of games, which does not shift to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. It is said. By providing the RT1 game state during such a fixed number of bonus non-winning states, it is possible to adjust the frequency of accidental transitions by the stop operation, and as a result, the profit on the player side and the profit on the game store side are combined. The balance can be adjusted. As a result, the variables that adjust the profit balance of both parties can be further diversified, and a gaming machine rich in game playability can be provided.

Subsequently, the bonus state is a gaming state corresponding to any of the bonus states on the main side (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state) and the ART gaming state. Specifically, in the transition lottery (F) to ART performed during the bonus state, (F1), after the operation of the BB is completed, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state. If (F2) is not won in this transition lottery, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state after the operation of the BB ends. The details of the transition lottery (F) in the bonus state will be described later, but in the bonus state, when the combination of the above-mentioned "7-matched lip" symbols can be displayed, the ART is won and the BB is also displayed. If you win a predetermined lottery that is performed at the end of the operation of, you will win an ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the specific effect state start means, and when the transition to ART is won in the transition lottery (A) during the normal gaming state (A1), the transition lottery in the CZ. When the transition to ART is won in (C) (C1), when the transition to ART is won in the transition lottery (D) during the high-probability gaming state (D1), and the transition lottery (F) during the bonus state. When the transition to ART is won (F1), the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is a gaming state that notifies the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, corresponds to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and is on the sub side. It is a game state in which the ART lottery is won. In the ART game state, for example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning push order bell is displayed so that a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts (C_CD bell with 10 payouts) is displayed. Notify the order of pressing the correct answer. Further, in the ART gaming state, for example, when the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that maintains the RT4 gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is highly likely to be determined as the internal winning combination (for example, The correct push order is notified to the winning push order lip so that the RT4 transition lip) is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ally character and the enemy character battle each other during the ART game state, and when the ally character wins, the ART game state is continued, and when the enemy character wins, the ART End the game state. In order to provide such playability, the ART game state is composed of an enemy determination ART and a battle ART, as shown in FIG. 66.

The enemy determination ART is an ART game state during a period in which the type of the enemy character to play against the ally character is determined. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART and the bonus state. Specifically, when the enemy character is determined in (G) enemy determination ART, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the enemy determination ART to the battle ART. The method of determining the enemy character during the enemy determination ART will be described later.

In addition, the battle ART is an ART gaming state during a period in which the enemy character and the ally character determined in the enemy determination ART compete against each other. As shown in FIG. 66, there is a possibility of shifting from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, the general gaming state (normal gaming state), and the bonus state. Specifically, in the battle (H) during the battle ART, when the (H1) ally character wins, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the game state from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART, and (H2) the enemy character wins. Then, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the battle ART to the general gaming state. The method of determining the outcome of the battle (H) during the battle ART will be described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the advantageous state start means, and the winning combination related to the replay is internally won during the enemy determination ART and the battle ART, which are started based on the winning of the transition lottery. The notification of the mode of the stop operation (for example, the push order for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the RT4 transition lip) necessary for maintaining the RT4 gaming state with a high probability of being determined as a winning combination is started.

[Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning role]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the type of winning combination managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviation shown in the correspondence table of FIG. In addition, about "off", it may be "pure off" only during the RT4 game state. In addition, the correspondence between the main side and the sub side of the winning combination can be different depending on the game state. In this regard, the correspondence shown in FIG. 67 shows the correspondence in the gaming state other than the bonus state, and the correspondence in the bonus state is shown in FIG. 96.

[Outline of the production performed by the liquid crystal display device 11]
FIG. 68 shows an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. In FIG. 68, the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into two areas, a first display area 111 and a second display area 112, for the sake of simplicity, but in the actual pachislot machine 1, the respective areas are mixed. It will be formed as one.

The first display area 111 is an area where the main effect is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 68, a display example during the battle ART is shown. During the battle ART, as shown in Fig. 68, the ally character and the enemy character will play against each other, and each attack / defense will reduce their physical strength (HP) to win or lose. ..

In the second display area 112, the apocalypse 113 that affects various lottery and the like performed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side is displayed. The apocalypse 113 includes five areas 113A, 113B, 113C, 113D, and 113E for setting the effect balls described later. In the area 113A, effect balls that affect various lottery in this game are set, in the area 113B, effect balls that affect various lottery in the next game are set, and in the area 113C, two game destinations Production balls that affect various lottery in the game are set, and production balls that affect various lottery in the game of 3 game destinations are set in the area 113D, and various lottery in the game of 4 game destinations are set in the area 113E. A production ball that affects the is set. That is, in the apocalypse 113, a production ball that affects various lottery in the five games including this game is set. The set area of the production ball set in the apocalypse 113 is updated as the game progresses. When the apocalypse 113 is activated, some effect ball (including a blank (empty)) is set, and when it is not operating, the effect ball is not set.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may or may not operate, and operates by winning an operation lottery described later. When the apocalypse 113 is activated in the normal game state and the high-probability game state, any one of the lottery ball 1, the lottery ball 2, the lottery ball 3, the lottery ball 4, and the fixed ball is displayed in the areas 113A to 113E as shown in FIG. The production ball of is set. The lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the normal game state and the high probability game state have an influence in the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) and (D). More specifically, the lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls set in the area 113A affect the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) and (D) in the current game.

The above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) is performed at two timings, one is when the reels rotate and the other is when the reels are stopped during one game. Of these, for the transition lottery (A) and (D) performed at the start of reel rotation (start), the lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls set in the area 113A are used as the lottery result regardless of the internal winning combination. Affect on. On the other hand, with respect to the transition lottery (A) (D) performed when the reels are stopped, the lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls set in the area 113A have a combination of symbols displayed when the reels are stopped, which is "bell winning" or more. Only in certain cases will it affect the lottery results. In addition, "bell winning" means that the combination of symbols at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order is displayed in the pushing order bell, or the combination of symbols corresponding to the common bell is displayed, and "bell winning" or higher. Is either "Bell Winning" or a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the rare roles such as Chanlip, Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Fixed Role, Watermelon, and Pure Off (see Figure 67). Is.

The lottery balls 1 to the fixed balls have different effects on the transition lottery (A) and (D). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the lottery ball 1 has a low probability of winning CZ or higher (CZ or ART), the lottery ball 2 has a medium probability of winning CZ or higher, and the lottery ball 3 has a medium probability of winning. The winning probability of CZ or higher is high, the winning ball 4 has a winning probability of CZ or higher, and the confirmed ball has a winning ART.

Subsequently, in CZ, Revelation 113 is always in operation. In CZ, in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, as shown in FIG. 57, either the development ball or the avoidance ball is set, or no effect ball is set, and the blank (empty) state is set. The development ball and the avoidance ball set in the apocalypse 113 in the CZ affect the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) to the ART performed during the CZ. More specifically, the development ball and the avoidance ball set in the area 113A have an influence in the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) to ART in this game.

Specifically, when the development ball is set in the area 113A and the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) to ART is performed. Then, when the stop operation is performed in this game, if the stop operation is the correct stop operation in the push order determined for the winning push order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) Becomes "invalid". On the other hand, when this stop operation is a stop operation of an incorrect answer in the push order determined for the winning push order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes "maintenance". As described above, the CZ is a completion type CZ, and the CZ ends when the transition lottery (C) performed in the middle stage before the completion is "maintained". Therefore, in the game in which the development ball is set in the area 113A, the player desires that the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination (the transition lottery (C) itself is not performed), and the push order is tentatively performed. If the bell is determined to be the internal winning combination, it is hoped that the answers are correct in the order of pushing (the transition lottery (C) becomes invalid).

In the above description, the fact that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is "maintained" means that the wrong answer is stopped in the push order in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. It is synonymous with displaying the combination of symbols (bell spilled eyes) displayed in the case. Therefore, the end condition of CZ can also be that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is "maintained", and the bell spill is displayed in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. It can also be said that.

Further, in the above description, when the bell spilled eye is displayed, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is set to "invalid", but the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) is set to "invalid" when the push order of the push order bell is correct, it would be disadvantageous to the player if the transition lottery (C) was won. become. In this regard, by "maintaining" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) without "invalidating" when the push order of the push order bell is correct, CZ can be continued without giving a disadvantage to the player. , Suitable. If it is decided to "maintain" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) when the push order of the push order bell is correct, the condition that the push order bell is pushed in the wrong answer may be used as the end condition of CZ. preferable. As a result, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) can be "maintained" while the CZ is continued. Further, to "maintain" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) while continuing the CZ means, for example, when the transition lottery (C) is won, the ART right (number of sets) is determined according to the lottery result. It means giving a number (one or more). By "maintaining" the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) during the CZ in this way, the transition lottery (first right grant lottery) performed in the middle of the CZ and the transition lottery (second) performed when the CZ is completed. The rights (number of sets) of ART granted in both the right grant lottery) can be granted, and as a result, ART for the rights can be executed after the end of CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the right number of times management means and the advantageous state control means, and is given in both the transition lottery performed in the middle stage of the CZ and the transition lottery performed when the CZ is completed. The total number of ART rights is counted, and ART is executed for the total number of times after the CZ is completed.

On the other hand, the avoidance ball and the blank (empty) are production balls that do not perform the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) to ART even if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. From the player's point of view, in a game in which an avoidance ball and a blank (empty) are set, the game can be played with peace of mind.

Subsequently, in the enemy decision ART, the apocalypse 113 always operates. As shown in FIG. 68, any of the boss balls 1 to boss balls 8 and the ally balls are set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113 in the enemy determination ART. The boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls set in the apocalypse 113 in the enemy decision ART affect the lottery of the enemy decision performed during the enemy decision ART. More specifically, the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls set in the area 113A have an influence on the lottery for determining the enemy in this game.

Specifically, when any of the boss balls 1 to 8 is set in the area 113A, when the push order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, the set The boss according to the type of boss ball being played is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. The bosses corresponding to the boss balls 1 to 8 are enemy characters having different characteristics, which will be described in detail later. On the other hand, if any of the boss balls 1 to 8 is set in the area 113A and a player other than the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the enemy character of the opponent is not determined and the enemy is determined. ART will continue. Further, when any of the boss balls 1 to 8 is set in the area 113A, any one of pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or champ (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning role. Then, the opponent is not decided, and the stock lottery of the ally ball is performed. In the situation where the ally balls are stocked by winning this stock lottery, the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse are rewritten to the ally balls.

In addition, when a ally ball is set in the area 113A during the enemy determination ART, a lottery is performed to increase the physical strength (HP) of the ally character based on the internal winning combination. If you win this lottery, the physical strength of the ally character will increase, so the expectation that the ally character will win in the subsequent battle ART will increase.

Subsequently, in battle ART, Revelation 113 is always activated. In the battle ART, as shown in FIG. 68, one of a friendly ball, an enemy ball, and an awakening ball is set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. The ally ball, enemy ball, and awakening ball set in Apocalypse 113 in the battle ART affect the result of the battle performed during the battle ART. More specifically, the ally ball, the enemy ball, and the awakening ball set in the area 113A affect the battle in this or subsequent game.

Specifically, when a friendly ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if the push order bell or the common bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the character corresponding to the type of the set production ball is displayed. Attack the opponent in the game. For example, when a ally ball is set, the ally character attacks the enemy character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character decreases. On the other hand, when the enemy ball is set, the enemy character attacks the ally character, and as a result, the physical strength (HP) of the ally character decreases.

On the other hand, when a friendly ball or an enemy ball is set in the area 113A, if any of pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or champ (so-called rare role) is determined as the internal winning role, Regardless of the type of production ball that is set, the ally character attacks the enemy character. In this case, the physical strength (HP) of the enemy character is basically reduced more than when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

In addition, when an awakening ball is set in the area 113A, if it is determined as an internal winning combination of push order bell, common bell, pure loss, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, or champ, the ally character will be selected. Along with attacking enemy characters, ally balls are stocked. Then, when the ally balls are stocked, the enemy balls set in the apocalypse are rewritten as ally balls by the amount stocked. As a result, the situation in which the ally character attacks after that increases, and as a result, the expectation that the ally character wins in the battle ART increases.

[How to manage production balls]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, a method of managing the effect balls in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 101 stores information about the effect ball set in the apocalypse 113 in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 103. As described above, since the effect balls are set in the apocalypse 113 corresponding to the five areas 113A to 113E, five or more effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103. In this respect, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103.

Of these six effect balls, the effect ball stored in the storage area "1" is set corresponding to the area 113A, and the effect ball stored in the storage area "2" is set corresponding to the area 113B. , The effect ball stored in the storage area "3" is set corresponding to the area 113C, and the effect ball stored in the storage area "4" is set corresponding to the area 113D and stored in the storage area "5". The effect ball to be produced is set corresponding to the area 113E, and the effect ball stored in the storage area "6" is not set in the current game but is set in the next game in response to the area 113E.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the time point (current game) in FIG. 69 (a), the lottery balls 1, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, and the lottery balls 4 are fixed in the storage areas "1" to "5", respectively. The balls are stored, and as a result, a lottery ball 1, a lottery ball 2, a lottery ball 3, a lottery ball 4, and a fixed ball are set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113, respectively. On the other hand, although the lottery ball 3 is stored in the storage area "6", the lottery ball stored in the storage area "6" is not set in the apocalypse 113 at the time of FIG. 69 (a).

After that, in the next game, the effect balls stored in the storage area are updated, and the effect balls set in the areas 113A to 113E slide one by one. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game are stored in the storage areas "2" to "6" at the time point (previous game) in FIG. 69 (a). Each of the effect balls stored in "" is stored, and a new effect ball is stored in the storage area "6" of the next game by lottery. As a result, the lottery balls 2, the lottery balls 3, the lottery balls 4, the fixed balls, and the production balls 2 stored in the storage areas "1" to "5" of the next game are set in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. Will be done.

The effect balls stored in the respective storage areas are set in each area by the operation of the apocalypse 113 (that is, displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Here, as described above, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the apocalypse 113 may or may not operate, and therefore, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, it is stored in the storage area. The production ball may not be set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. On the other hand, in CZ and ART, since the apocalypse 113 always operates, the effect balls stored in the storage area are always set (displayed) in each area of the apocalypse 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 constitutes the effect information storage means, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, the sub RAM 103 is divided into the storage areas "1" to "6" corresponding to the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. Memorize the production ball. Further, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes a display means, and under the control of the sub control circuit 101, a part of the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 (for example, the storage areas “1” to “5”). Is displayed in the areas 113A to 113E of the apocalypse 113. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an effect information registration means, a first effect information registration means, and a second effect information registration means, and each game state (normal game state, high probability game state, CZ, ART game state). ), The production balls to be registered for the games for 6 games (multiple games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead) are drawn, and the production balls determined by the lottery (lottery balls 1 to 4, confirmed balls). , Boss balls 1-8, enemy balls, ally balls, etc.) are registered in the sub RAM 103 as production information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the types of effect balls set in the apocalypse 113 are different between the normal game state and the high probability game state, the CZ, the enemy determination ART, and the battle ART. Therefore, the sub RAM 103 may be provided with a storage area according to each state. In CZ, enemy determination ART, and battle ART, the initial lottery of the effect balls is performed at the start of each state, and all the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are cleared at the end of each state. Therefore, for CZ, enemy determination ART, and battle ART, since the timing of using the storage area does not overlap, a common storage area may be used.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are maintained regardless of whether the apocalypse 113 is activated or not. That is, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 immediately before the apocalypse 113 is deactivated is maintained even during the non-operation of the apocalypse 113, and is maintained in the sub RAM 103 when the apocalypse 113 is activated next time. Directing balls are set in each area of Revelation 113. The storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is basically maintained during the game, but is cleared at a predetermined timing. The timing for clearing the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described later.

[ART and CZ lottery during normal game state and high probability game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 87, the details of the lottery (A) and (D) for shifting to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram of a transition lottery (A) (D) performed during a normal gaming state and a high-probability gaming state, and FIGS. 71 to 87 are referred to during the transition lottery (A) (D). Various data tables. Various data tables are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of transition lottery (A) (D)>
With reference to FIG. 70, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started in the normal game state and the high probability game state, the internal winning combination is determined by the control of the main control circuit 91. .. In the normal game state and the high-probability game state, when the internal winning combination is determined, first, the ART and CZ transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed. In the transition lottery (A) (D) at the start, basically, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the gaming state, and the winning probability of ART or CZ is higher in the high probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state. The probability is high. In the transition lottery (A) (D) at the start, as will be described later, ART is performed not only by the game state but also by the internal winning combination and the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to fixed balls) set in the area 113A. Or, the winning probability of CZ is different.

Further, in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, when the internal winning combination is determined, the apocalypse lottery for whether or not to activate the apocalypse is performed. In this apocalypse lottery, the winning probability differs depending on the winning mode of the apocalypse operation. Specifically, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation includes a low mode, a high mode, and a concentrated mode (there are also short, middle, and long states, respectively), and the winning mode of operating the apocalypse in the concentrated mode is low. It does not apply to activate the apocalypse in mode and high mode. In the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the apocalypse is activated when the promotion to the intensive mode is possible.

After that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the transfer lottery (A) (D) of ART and CZ at the time of reel stop is performed depending on whether or not the apocalypse is activated. Specifically, when the apocalypse is operating, the ART and CZ are set based on the combination of the effect balls (lottery balls 1 to fixed balls) set in the area 113A and the symbols of "bell winning" or higher. Transition lottery (A) (D) is performed. In the transition lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped, the winning probability of ART or CZ differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A.

On the other hand, when the apocalypse is not operating, the promotion lottery of the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed. When the apocalypse is not operating, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is not set in the apocalypse (in other words, it is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, this promotion lottery will be performed for hidden information that does not appear in the table. As will be described in detail later, since the rotating accessory 200 is driven during the period during which the promotion lottery is performed, the player can grasp that the promotion lottery is being performed.

<Various data tables referenced in the transition lottery (A) (D)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 87, the transition lottery (A) and (D) to ART and CZ performed during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be specifically described.

<ART lottery table at the start>
70 to 73 are diagrams showing a start ART lottery table referred to in the start transition lottery (A) (D) during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The ART lottery table at the start defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result for each of the current game state, the effect ball set in the area 113A, and the internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, on the sub (sub-control circuit 101) side, the effect random values extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 32767" are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values according to each lottery result. The lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred).

With reference to the ART lottery table at the start shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, the probability of winning the CZ or ART differs depending on the effect ball set in the area 113A during the normal game state, and the internal winning combination It can be seen that the probability of winning CZ or ART differs depending on the situation. Further, when the start ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is compared with the start ART lottery table shown in FIG. 73, in the high probability gaming state, the ART is won with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state. It can be seen that, in the high-probability gaming state, there is a probability of winning the ART in all the winning combinations, but in the normal gaming state, only some of the winning combinations win the ART. Winning only some of the roles is synonymous with winning the transition lottery to ART, so in the normal game state, if some of the roles are decided as internal winnings. The transition lottery (A) at the start is performed only for the player, and in the high-probability gaming state, the transition lottery (A) at the start is performed when a plurality of combinations including some of these combinations are determined as internal winning combinations. become. Similarly, referring to the ART lottery table at the start shown in FIG. 73, it can be seen that in the high-probability gaming state, although the CZ is not won, the probability of winning the ART is high.

<Mode transition lottery table>
74 to 78 are mode transition lottery tables referred to in the winning mode transition lottery of the apocalypse operation during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The mode transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the transition destination winning mode for each winning mode of the current apocalypse operation and the internal winning combination, whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating. Whether or not the apocalypse is currently operating is determined by the apocalypse flag, and when the apocalypse flag is "0", it means that the apocalypse is not operating, and when the apocalypse flag is "1", the apocalypse is activated. It means being inside.

As described above, the winning mode of the apocalypse operation includes a low mode, a high mode, and a concentrated mode, and each mode is provided with states such as short, middle, and long. The low mode, the high mode, and the intensive mode are the winning modes in which the winning expectation of the apocalypse lottery is different as described above. In addition, short, middle and long are states that specify whether it is easy to shift to a more advantageous winning mode or a more disadvantageous winning mode. Specifically, a short is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode, and a state in which it is most likely to shift to a more disadvantageous winning mode, and a middle is a state in which it is most difficult to shift to a more advantageous winning mode. The state is the state in which the transition to the more disadvantageous winning mode is likely to occur next, and the long is the state in which the transition to the more advantageous winning mode is the easiest and the transition to the more disadvantageous winning mode is the most difficult.

As shown in FIGS. 74 to 78, when the apocalypse is not operating (revelation flag 0), the winning mode basically goes up in the order of low mode, high mode, and concentrated mode, and once goes up to concentrated mode. And, it does not go down to low mode and high mode until the apocalypse is activated.

<Apocalypse operation lottery table>
FIG. 79 is an apocalypse operation lottery table referred to in the apocalypse lottery during the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state. The apocalypse operation lottery table defines whether or not the apocalypse is currently in operation, the winning mode of the current apocalypse operation, and the lottery value information regarding the operation of the apocalypse for each internal winning combination. Here, the operation of the apocalypse is performed over the guaranteed number of games to be added or subtracted as a result of the apocalypse lottery. Specifically, as a result of the apocalypse lottery, the number of guarantees is added by the number corresponding to the case where "Apocalypse is in operation_guarantee 1 addition" to "Apocalypse is in operation_guarantee 5 addition" is won, and "Apocalypse is in operation_guarantee" If "subtraction" is won, the guaranteed number of times is deducted by 1. Then, as a result of this addition / subtraction, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0, the operation of the apocalypse ends (the apocalypse flag changes from 1 to 0). If the guaranteed number of times is added by 1 or more when the apocalypse flag is 0, the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1 and the apocalypse is activated.

Further, in the apocalypse operation lottery table, "no apocalypse operation" means that the apocalypse lottery is not won, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 0. Similarly, "revelation in operation_maintenance" means that the operation of the apocalypse is maintained without adding or subtracting the guaranteed number of times, and the apocalypse flag is maintained at 1.

With reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table in FIGS. 79 (A) and 79 (B), if the apocalypse is not currently operating, the apocalypse may start operating only if the winning mode is the centralized mode. I understand. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, an effect suggesting the current winning mode may be performed. For example, the current winning mode can be suggested by moving the rotating accessory 200. Specifically, the probability of moving the rotating accessory 200 differs depending on the winning mode. For example, in the situation of staying in the concentrated mode, the probability of moving the rotating accessory 200 is increased, and the mode is set to high mode or low mode. In the situation of staying, it is conceivable to reduce the probability of moving the rotating accessory 200. Similarly, in the apocalypse lottery, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the apocalypse will be activated (the number of guarantees will be added) may be performed. In particular, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation may be different from that of the rotating accessory 200. Specifically, the panel device 400 may display the image corresponding to the latent image 402 in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation.

<Apocalypse MAP lottery table>
80 and 81 are apocalypse MAP lottery tables for drawing apocalypse MAPs for determining the effect balls to be set in the operating apocalypse in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the larger the MAP number, the more advantageous it is for the player. This point is the same not only for the apocalypse MAP but also for other MAPs described later. The apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 80 is a table that is referred to when the apocalypse is activated (the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1). Further, the apocalypse MAP lottery table of FIG. 81 is a table that is referred to when the MAP data defined for each apocalypse MAP is 0.

The apocalypse MAP lottery table defines the lottery value information for the apocalypse MAP of the migration destination for each current apocalypse MAP. It is assumed that "MAP0" is set as the apocalypse MAP at the initial stage when the power is turned on.

<MAP data correspondence table>
The apocalypse MAP defines MAP data for determining the effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of MAP data defined in each apocalypse MAP. As shown in FIG. 82, the apocalypse MAP1 is defined with MAP data “1” in the first game and MAP data “0” in the second game. When the MAP data "0" is specified, a new apocalypse MAP is drawn by referring to the apocalypse MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 81.

<Production ball lottery table when the apocalypse is activated>
FIG. 83 is an apocalypse operating effect ball lottery table for determining an effect ball to be set in the operating apocalypse in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. The effect ball lottery table at the time of apocalypse operation defines the information of the lottery value for the effect ball set for each MAP data. As shown in FIG. 83, the larger the MAP data, the more advantageous the effect ball is set for the player. In addition, in FIG. 83, the fixed ball is not drawn. Although the explanation of this point is omitted, for example, by performing a lottery to promote the production ball set at the time of winning the role of rare, it is possible to upgrade from the lottery ball 1 to the lottery ball 4 to the fixed ball. May be good.

Further, in FIG. 83, information on the lottery value for the effect ball is also defined for the MAP data “0”. As described above, in the case of MAP data "0", a new apocalypse MAP is drawn. Here, either the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP or the lottery of the production ball based on the MAP data "0" may be prioritized. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the production ball is not drawn even once in the lottered apocalypse MAP, the lottery of the production ball based on the MAP data "0" is prioritized and the lottered apocalypse is drawn. If the production ball is drawn even once in the MAP, the lottery of the new apocalypse MAP will be given priority. For example, in the case of the apocalypse MAP "0", since all the MAP data between the five games are "0" (see FIG. 82), the production balls are drawn once based on the MAP data "0", and then a new one is drawn. Lottery the Apocalypse MAP. On the other hand, in the case of the apocalypse MAP "1", since the MAP data of the first game is "1" and the MAP data of the second game is "0" (see FIG. 82), the effect based on the MAP data "0" A new apocalypse MAP is drawn after the production ball is drawn based on the MAP data "1" without performing the ball lottery.

This point is the same for other MAPs described later. Specifically, the MAP data "0" is drawn based on the MAP data "0" only in the first game, and in the case of the transition to the second game, the lottery based on the MAP data "0" is not performed. , Lottery a new MAP. When such control is performed, the lottery based on the MAP data "0" is not performed for the MAP whose MAP number is "1" or more.

<Flow of setting the production ball to the apocalypse>
Here, the flow when setting the production ball in the apocalypse will be specifically described. When the apocalypse lottery is won and the apocalypse flag is updated from 0 to 1, the apocalypse is activated. In accordance with the operation of the apocalypse, the sub-control circuit 101 sets the effect ball stored in the sub-RAM 103 in the apocalypse. As described above, since the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is basically maintained during the game, when the apocalypse is activated, the maintained production ball is set in the apocalypse. become. On the other hand, the storage area corresponding to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is also turned on when the setting is changed or when the business starts the next day (when a predetermined time has elapsed from the turning off the power to turning on the power again). It is cleared at a predetermined timing such as (time). Then, when the storage area corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state is cleared, the effect ball is initially set (re-lottered) in the storage area. Hereinafter, the flow of initial setting of the storage area according to the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described.

In the initial setting of the storage area according to the normal game state and the high probability game state, the apocalypse MAP is first drawn. In this initial setting, the apocalypse MAP "0", which is the initial apocalypse MAP, is set first. In this apocalypse MAP "0", as shown in FIG. 82, "0" is defined as the MAP data of the first game. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 draws the first production ball based on the MAP data "0" of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 83, "lottery ball 1" is determined as the first effect ball.

Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “0”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 101 draws a new apocalypse MAP without drawing the effect ball. Specifically, the migration destination apocalypse MAP is drawn from the current apocalypse MAP "0" with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to at the time of the MAP data "0" shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 81, the apocalypse MAP "1" is drawn as the apocalypse MAP of the migration destination. In this apocalypse MAP "1", as shown in FIG. 82, "1" is defined as the MAP data of the first game and "0" is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 draws a second production ball based on the MAP data "1" of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 83, for example, "lottery ball 2" is determined as the second effect ball.

Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the MAP data of the second game of the apocalypse MAP “1”. As shown in FIG. 82, since the MAP data of the second game is “0”, the sub-control circuit 101 draws a new apocalypse MAP without drawing the effect ball. Specifically, the migration destination apocalypse MAP is drawn from the current apocalypse MAP "1" with reference to the apocalypse MAP lottery table referred to at the time of the MAP data "0" shown in FIG. With reference to FIG. 81, for example, the apocalypse MAP “2” is drawn as the migration destination apocalypse MAP. In this apocalypse MAP "2", as shown in FIG. 70, "1" is defined as the MAP data of the first game and "0" is defined as the MAP data of the second game. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 draws a third effect ball based on the MAP data "1" of the first game. As a result, referring to the effect ball lottery table at the time of apocalypse operation shown in FIG. 83, for example, "lottery ball 3" is determined as the third effect ball.

Similarly, when six effect balls are repeatedly determined, the sub-control circuit 101 ends the lottery of the effect balls, and stores the determined effect balls in order in the sub RAM 103. The order of determining the effect balls is arbitrary, but for example, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the effect balls in the order corresponding to each region of the apocalypse 113. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 determines in order from the effect ball set in the area 113A of the apocalypse 113.

<Promotion of production ball>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 84, a method of promoting the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of a method for promoting a production ball used during a normal gaming state and a high-probability gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, a predetermined number of effect balls are stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 even when the apocalypse is not activated. The memorized production ball is not set (displayed) in the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (a) when the apocalypse is inactive, but corresponds to the apocalypse as shown in FIG. 84 (b) when the apocalypse is activated. Set (displayed) in the area.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, promotion lottery of the effect balls (that is, the effect balls that are not displayed) stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed in the situation where the apocalypse is not activated. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the lottery ball 1 stored in the storage area “1” in FIG. 84 (a) is promoted to the lottery ball 3 as shown in FIG. 84 (c) as a result of the promotion lottery. .. After that, when the apocalypse is activated, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is set (displayed) in the corresponding area of the apocalypse. Comparing FIGS. 84 (b) and 84 (d), it can be seen that as a result of the promotion lottery, the effect balls set in the area 113A have been promoted from the lottery balls 1 to the lottery balls 3.

Such a promotion lottery will be performed when the rotating accessory 200 is movable in a situation where the apocalypse is inactive. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the cover member 198 corresponding to the eyelid of the rotating accessory 200, which is the accessory of the eyeball, is released and the eyeball main body 203 corresponding to the eyeball becomes visible to the player, it is hidden. The promotion lottery of the production ball will be held. Therefore, when the eyeball body 203 appears during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, the promotion lottery of the production ball that affects the ART lottery is performed, so that the player sees the eyeball body 203. During the period, the game will be played in the hope that it will be promoted to a more advantageous production ball.

<Movable lottery table for accessories>
FIG. 85 is an accessory movable lottery table for drawing whether or not to perform a promotion lottery of the effect ball that is being hidden during the apocalypse non-operation in the normal game state and the high probability game state. The accessory movable lottery table defines information on the lottery value related to the movement of the rotating accessory 200 for each internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, when the guarantee of the movement of the accessory becomes 1 or more as a result of the lottery using the movable accessory lottery table, the rotating accessory 200 is moved (the cover member 198 is opened). A movable request is made to the control task (see FIG. 132 described later). As described above, while the rotating accessory 200 is moving, the promotion lottery of the hidden effect ball is performed. Therefore, the accessory movable lottery table shifts to the period for performing the promotion lottery. It can be said that it is a table for drawing lots of whether or not to do it.

As shown in FIG. 85, the guaranteed number of movable characters is basically added by determining the rare role as the internal winning combination, and the combination other than the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination. By doing so, it is subtracted or maintained. After the guaranteed number of movable accessories becomes 1 or more and the rotating accessory 200 moves, when the guaranteed number of movable accessories becomes 0, the movement of the rotating accessory 200 ends and the cover member 198 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the accessory movable lottery means, selects whether or not to perform the promotion lottery using the accessory movable lottery table, and guarantees the accessory movement based on the lottery result. When the number becomes 1 or more, a movable request for the rotating accessory 200 is performed.

<Direction ball promotion lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 86 draws a lottery as to whether or not to promote the hidden effect ball in the state where the rotating accessory 200 is movable (that is, when the guaranteed number of movable accessories is 1 or more). It is a production ball promotion lottery table for. The production ball promotion lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the number of promotion balls promoted for each internal winning combination. The effect balls corresponding to the normal game state and the high-probability game state are provided in the order of lottery ball 1, lottery ball 2, lottery ball 3, lottery ball 4, and fixed ball according to the degree of expectation of ART or CZ winning. The number of promotions specified in the production ball promotion lottery table indicates the number of stages in which these production balls are promoted to production balls with higher expectations. For example, "one-step promotion" means promotion from lottery ball 1 to lottery ball 2, promotion from lottery ball 2 to lottery ball 3, and "two-step promotion" means promotion from lottery ball 1 to lottery ball 1. It means promotion to a lottery ball 3, promotion from a lottery ball 2 to a lottery ball 4, and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the promotion lottery means, and whether or not to promote the hidden effect ball by using the effect ball promotion lottery table in the state where the rotating accessory 200 is moving. Lottery.

As described above, the sub RAM 103 stores six effect balls. Here, when it is decided to promote the production ball in the promotion lottery, the production ball to be promoted is arbitrary. For example, all six production balls may be promoted all at once according to the result of the promotion lottery, or only one or more production balls to be promoted may be promoted according to the result of the promotion lottery. Good. In this case, the method of determining one or more effect balls to be promoted is also arbitrary.

For example, it is conceivable that six production balls are sequentially determined as production balls to be promoted. Specifically, first, the effect ball stored in the storage area "1" of the sub RAM 103 is determined as the effect ball to be promoted, and then the effect ball stored in the storage area "2" is to be promoted. It is decided as a production ball of. In this case, the timing of updating the effect ball to be promoted is also arbitrary. For example, if a predetermined number of games have been completed or a promotion lottery is performed for a predetermined number of times for a production ball to be promoted (note that the lottery value is specified only for "no promotion", the promotion lottery may be performed. In addition, the promotion target production ball may be updated when the promotion lottery is performed. Also, if the promotion target production ball can be promoted even in one stage, the promotion target production ball is released. It may be updated, or when the effect ball to be promoted can be promoted to a predetermined effect ball (for example, lottery ball 4), the effect ball to be promoted may be updated. In addition, when it is decided to promote a plurality of stages as a result of the promotion lottery, only the production balls that were the target of promotion in this game may be promoted to a plurality of stages, and the production balls may be promoted to one stage. While promoting, it is possible to promote a plurality of production balls one step at a time, such as raising the next promotion target production ball by one stage, or while promoting the production ball that was the promotion target by two stages. It is also possible to promote a plurality of production balls while weighting them according to whether or not they are promotion targets, such as shifting the production balls to be promoted to one stage.

Further, for example, it is conceivable to determine one or a plurality of effect balls determined by lottery out of the six effect balls as the effect balls to be promoted. In addition, the lottery for determining the production ball to be promoted may be given a predetermined weight. The weighting method is arbitrary, but for example, a production ball with a low expectation can be easily drawn as a production ball to be promoted, and a production ball that is determined as a promotion target production ball less frequently. It can be easily drawn as a production ball to be promoted. Even in this case, the production balls to be promoted may be updated at an arbitrary timing, and when it is decided to promote a plurality of stages, the production balls other than the production balls to be promoted may also be updated. It may be promoted.

<Control of rotating accessory 200 at the time of promotion>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the rotating accessory 200 may be controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery. As described above, the rotating accessory 200 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, and irradiates the eyeball main body 203 from the back side. At the time of promotion lottery, the eyeball body 203 appears due to the movement of the rotating accessory 200. Therefore, the pachislot 1 controls the LED according to the result of the promotion lottery, and the eyeball body 203 visible to the player is displayed in various colors. By emitting light with, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the promotion lottery in a guessable manner. For example, it is conceivable to notify the result of the promotion lottery by controlling the LED and emitting light of the eyeball body 203 in various colors such as white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. Since the light emission of the plurality of LEDs provided in the rotating accessory 200 is controlled by a lamp control task described later, for example, the light emission of the eyeball main body 203 is the light emission color and light emission of the LED corresponding to the eyeball main body 203. It is executed by requesting the pattern from the ramp control task.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, six effect balls are stored in the sub RAM 103, but the relationship between the emission color of the LED and the effect balls can be arbitrarily set. For example, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on the total number of promotion of the six effect balls. As an example, when the total number of promotion of 6 effect balls is "1" or less, the LED emits "white", and when the total number is "3" or less, the LED emits "blue". When the total number is "5" or less, the LED is emitted in "yellow".

Further, the light emission of the LED may be controlled based on the type of the effect ball after promotion of any one or a plurality of the six effect balls. Specifically, as a result of the promotion lottery, based on the type of the production ball with the highest expectation among the six production balls, for example, when the production ball with the highest expectation is the lottery ball 1, the LED is set to " Lights up in "white", emits LED in "blue" when the most promising production ball is the lottery ball 2, and turns the LED "yellow" when the most promising production ball is the lottery ball 3. It emits light with.

According to the latter method, only one or more of the six production balls are promoted to high-expectation production balls, and the other production balls remain low-expectation production balls. However, the LED emits light in a highly expected color such as red or a rainbow, and as a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a highly expected color. On the other hand, if the 6 production balls are promoted evenly as a whole and all of the 6 production balls are production balls with relatively low expectations, the LED is a color with low expectations such as blue and yellow. As a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a color with a low degree of expectation.

On the other hand, according to the former method, when the total number of promotion of 6 production balls is small, even if any of the 6 production balls is promoted to a highly expected production ball, the LED is expected. It emits light in a color with a low degree, and as a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a color with a low degree of expectation. On the contrary, when the total number of promotion of 6 production balls is large, the LED is a color with high expectation even if all 6 production balls remain relatively low expectation. As a result, the eyeball body 203 emits light in a color with a high degree of expectation.

Further, the light emission of the LED may be controlled by combining the former method and the latter method. Specifically, if the total number of promotion of the 6 production balls is large, or if any one or more of the 6 production balls are promoted to the production balls with high expectations, the LED will be expected. If one or more of the one or more of the production balls is promoted to a production ball with high expectation without emitting light in a high color, and the total number of promotion of the six production balls is large, the LED is expected. It may be made to emit light with a high color.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, two lottery, a movable lottery of the rotating accessory 200 and a promotion lottery of the effect ball, are individually performed, but the movable lottery of the rotating accessory 200 is not performed. Only the promotion lottery of balls may be performed. Specifically, when it is decided to promote the effect ball as a result of the promotion lottery of the effect ball, the rotating accessory 200 may be moved and the eyeball main body 203 may appear on the surface.

By individually performing two lottery, the movable lottery of the rotating accessory 200 and the promotion lottery of the effect ball as in the present embodiment, it is possible to create a game period in which the effect ball is promoted. From the player's point of view, during this game period, there is a chance period for promoting the production ball, so that the interest during the period when the eyeball body 203 is visible is improved.

On the other hand, even in such a chance period, if the promotion lottery that is performed individually is not won, the production ball is not promoted. Therefore, in the method of performing the two lottery individually as in the present embodiment, Even if the eyeball body 203 becomes visible, the production ball may not be promoted. In this regard, in the method of moving the rotating accessory 200 when it is decided to promote the production ball by performing only the promotion lottery of the production ball, the production ball is always promoted when the eyeball body 203 becomes visible. Therefore, the player can have expectations for the subsequent game.

<ART lottery table when reel is stopped>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an ART lottery table when the reels are stopped, which is referred to in the transition lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped during the normal game state and the high probability gaming state. The ART lottery table when the reels are stopped defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result for each effect ball set in the area 113A. Here, as described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) when the reels are stopped, the effect ball set in the area 113A is the case where the combination of the symbols displayed when the reels are stopped is "bell winning" or more. Only affects the lottery results. Therefore, the ART lottery table when the reel is stopped shown in FIG. 87 is a table that is referred to only when the effect ball is set in the area 113A and the combination of the symbols displayed when the reel is stopped is "bell winning" or more. is there.

With reference to the ART lottery table when the reels are stopped shown in FIG. 87, the probability of winning the CZ or ART differs depending on the effect balls set in the area 113A. You can see that you will definitely win.

[Game in high probability game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the flow of the game other than the transition lottery (D) during the high-probability game state will be described. As described above, the high-probability gaming state corresponds to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side, and when the main side shifts from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, it is high. The stochastic game state also ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state. The case where the main side shifts from the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is a case where the push order bell or the push order lip is incorrect as described above. Therefore, the high-probability game state ends at the timing when the sub side grasps that the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is displayed on the push order bell or the push order lip. Here, even though the normal gaming state can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, if the high-probability gaming state is immediately terminated and the transition to the normal gaming state is performed, the interest is lost. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, the correct push order is notified to the push order bell and the push order lip only a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during the high-probability gaming state, and FIG. 89 is a data table referred to during the high-probability gaming state. The data table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of the flow of the game during the high-probability game state>
With reference to FIG. 88, when the combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition lip is displayed in the ART transition lottery in the normal gaming state during non-winning, the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. At this point, the gaming state on the sub side is the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). In this normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined by the control of the main control circuit 91. In the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), when the internal winning combination is determined, the avoidance points are drawn based on the determined internal winning combination. When the avoidance points are acquired in this lottery, the sub-control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state for the first time. The lottery (B) for transitioning to the high-probability gaming state described above in FIG. 66 corresponds to the lottery for the avoidance points.

In the high-probability gaming state, the situation in which the main side shifts to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won is avoided based on the acquired avoidance points. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state, when the start operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started, the internal winning combination is determined by the control of the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 determines whether or not there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state based on the internal winning combination. More specifically, when the internal winning combination is a push order bell or a push order lip, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-win state.

When there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state in which the bonus is not won, the sub-control circuit 101 gives the correct answer to the push order bell or push order lip determined as the internal winning combination only when the avoidance point remains. Notify the push order. By receiving this notification, the player can perform the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer, and the high-probability gaming state ends (that is, the RT1 gaming state shifts to the bonus non-winning state). That) can be avoided. If there are no avoidance points, the player himself will select the correct push order.

After that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, the game state is changed on the main side based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, when a bell spill or an RT1 transition lip is displayed, the player shifts to the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and in other cases, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is maintained. .. On the sub side, when the game state on the main side shifts to the RT1 game state in which the bonus is not won, the sub control circuit 101 ends the high-probability game state and starts the normal game state from the next game. On the other hand, when the game state on the main side maintains the RT4 game state in which the bonus is not won, the sub-control circuit 101 maintains the high-probability game state and sets the next game in the high-probability game state.
The above flow is the flow of the game in the high probability game state.

<Avoid point lottery table>
FIG. 89 is an avoidance point lottery table referred to in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state). The avoidance point lottery table defines the number of replays determined as the internal winning combination during the normal game state (RT4 gaming state), and the lottery value information for the avoidance points to be added for each internal winning combination in this game. .. As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), different avoidance point lottery tables are referenced based on the number of times the replay is determined as an internal winning combination. In FIG. 89, the number of times the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is different depending on whether the table is "0 times" or "1 time or more", but the number of times the table is changed is not limited to this. ..

With reference to the avoidance point lottery table shown in FIG. 89, in the normal game state (RT4 game state), if the replay is determined as an internal winning combination at least once, the probability that the avoidance points will be given increases, and in particular, the replay is 1. Avoidance points are more likely to be given in a replay that is determined as an internal winning combination after being determined as an internal winning combination more than once. As described above, in the RT4 game state, there is a high probability that the combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, if the normal game state (RT4 game state) continues for several games, avoidance points are given. Will be.

[Game in CZ]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. 90 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game in the CZ, and FIGS. 91 to 95 are data tables referred to in the CZ. The data tables shown in FIGS. 91 to 95 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of the flow of games during CZ>
As described above, in the transition lottery (A) (D) in the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, when the CZ is won, the gaming state shifts to the CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit constitutes the lottery state start means, and when the CZ is won in the transition lottery, the game state is shifted to the CZ. As shown in FIG. 90, in the first game after the transition to CZ, when the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation, CZ_MAP is drawn. The CZ is a complete chance zone that lasts up to 30 games, but ends when the transition lottery (C) to ART that is performed on the way is "maintained". In the transition lottery (C) to ART performed in the middle of this CZ, the winning probability of ART increases as the CZ continues. CZ_MAP is used to set the number of games in which the probability of winning ART is increased in the transition lottery (C) to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

When CZ_MAP is drawn in the first game after the transition to CZ, invalid points are subsequently drawn. The lottery of invalid points includes a lottery of initial values performed in the first game after the transition to CZ and an additional lottery performed in each game during CZ. The invalid point is information that determines the number of times to "invalidate" the transition lottery (C) to ART performed in the middle of CZ.

Then, a lottery of production balls to be set in the apocalypse is performed. After that, in the games other than the 30th game of CZ, it is determined whether or not the development ball is set in this game, that is, whether or not the development ball is set in the area 113A. If the development ball is set in this game, there is a possibility that a lottery (C) for transition to ART in the middle of CZ will be performed, and if the development ball is not set, basically the relevant No transition lottery (C) will be held. Specifically, when the development ball is set, the invalid point is 0, and the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery (C) to ART in the middle of CZ is performed. In the transition lottery during CZ, the winning probability of ART differs depending on the CZ mode, and when the CZ mode is 1 or higher, the ART is always won. The above-mentioned CZ_MAP is a MAP that sets the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 (see FIG. 92).

Here, when the development ball is set in this game and the invalid point is 1 or more, or when the avoidance ball is set in this game, an effect suggesting the current CZ mode is performed. May be. Specifically, since the number of games in which the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 is set in CZ_MAP, the current CZ mode is 1, and the CZ mode changes from 0 to 1 in a number of games. Whether it goes up can be specified from CZ_MAP. The sub-control circuit 101 is compared with other cases when the current CZ mode is 1 or when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within several times (for example, a few times). By performing the effects of different modes, it is possible to perform the effects suggesting the current CZ mode.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the game of the 30th game of CZ, the transition lottery (C) to ART is performed. In this case, a lottery (C) for transition to ART based on CZ mode 2 is always performed, and the ART is won on the assumption that the chance zone has been completed. Then, when the CZ is completed as described above, the state shifts to a more advantageous ART gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CZ is completed (30 games), the transition lottery (C) to ART is performed.

In CZ, if the transition lottery (C) to ART is performed with the development ball at the start, the following processing is performed. Specifically, after that, when the stop operation is performed and the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is "bell winning" or more, that is, the correct answer in the push order bell push order. Determine if you did. Then, if the correct answer is given in the push order of the push order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to the ART accompanying the development ball is invalidated regardless of whether or not the ART is won, and the CZ continues. become. On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect in the push order of the push order bell, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to ART accompanying the development ball is maintained, and then the game state is changed according to the lottery result. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the game state control means, performs the ART transition lottery (C) during the CZ, and shifts the game state to the ART game state according to the lottery result.

In this way, in CZ, the probability of winning the transition lottery (C) to ART increases as the CZ continues, and in addition, when the CZ is completed, the transition lottery to ART (C) must be won and Since the game shifts to an advantageous ART gaming state, the longer the CZ continues, the more advantageous the situation becomes for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game so that the CZ will continue. Here, since the end condition of CZ is that the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) to ART is maintained, the player can prevent the development ball from being set in the apocalypse and the development ball in the apocalypse. In the set game, the push order bell is not determined as the internal winning combination, and in the game in which the development ball is set in the apocalypse, the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. The game will be played so that the correct answer is given in the order of pressing.

<CZ_MAP lottery table>
FIG. 91 is a CZ_MAP lottery table referenced in the first game after the CZ transition. The CZ_MAP lottery table defines lottery value information for the type of CZ_MAP. Upon shifting to the CZ, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the CZ_MAP lottery table and draws the CZ_MAP used in the CZ.

<CZ_MAP correspondence table>
FIG. 92 is a CZ_MAP correspondence table showing the contents of CZ_MAP drawn by the CZ_MAP lottery table. For each of CZ_MAP, a CZ mode is set for each number of continuous games in CZ. The CZ mode is information for setting the winning probability of ART in the transition lottery (C) to ART during CZ as described above, and the larger the value of the CZ mode, the higher the winning probability of ART is set. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, each of the CZ_MAPs is set so that the CZ mode increases as the number of continuous games in the CZ increases, and once the CZ mode increases, it does not decrease. That is, each CZ_MAP is set so that the number of games that go up from CZ mode 0 to CZ mode 1 is different. Further, in all CZ_MAPs, when the number of continuous games is 30, the CZ mode is set to 2.

In the present embodiment, only three types of CZ modes, CZ modes 0, 1 and 2, are provided as CZ modes, but in the present invention, the CZ mode rises as the number of continuous games in CZ increases, and once CZ It suffices if the mode is set so that it does not decrease when the mode goes up, and the types of CZ modes are not limited to three types.

<Invalid point lottery table>
FIG. 93 is an invalid point lottery table. The invalid point lottery table draws invalid points that invalidate the transition lottery (C) to ART, which is performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball in CZ is set. Used for When the invalid point is 1 or more, the transition lottery (C) to ART, which is performed when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the development ball is set, is invalidated. If the number of invalid points is 1 or more, the transition lottery (C) may be performed once and then invalidated, or the transition lottery (C) may not be performed in the first place.

As described above, the lottery of invalid points includes a lottery of initial values performed in the first game after the transition to CZ and an additional lottery performed in each game during CZ. FIG. 93 (A) is an invalid point lottery table used for lottery of initial values, and defines information on lottery values for invalid points determined as initial values. Further, (B) and (C) of FIG. 93 are invalid point lottery tables used for the additional lottery, and the lottery for the invalid points added for each type of effect ball set in this game and the internal winning combination. Specify value information.

<Direction ball lottery table>
FIG. 94 is an effect ball lottery table used when drawing effect balls to be set in the apocalypse during CZ. Information on the lottery value for the effect ball to be set is specified for each final effect ball in the set. The final effect ball in the set is, for example, an effect ball set in the region 113E farthest from the current game. With reference to FIG. 94, when the final production ball in the set is a development ball, the development ball is not drawn. That is, during CZ, two development balls are not set in succession in the apocalypse areas 113A to 113E. On the other hand, if the final effect ball in the set is another (blank or avoidance ball), the development ball will be drawn with a predetermined probability.

In CZ, either the development ball or the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse, but as shown in the production ball lottery table, in the production ball lottery, only the development ball or the blank (empty) is drawn. Avoidance balls are not drawn. Here, the avoidance ball is set in the apocalypse by rewriting the set development ball when the invalid point is 1 or more and the development ball is set in the apocalypse. When the invalid point is 1 or more, the timing of rewriting the development ball to the avoidance ball is arbitrary. For example, of the areas 113A to 113E, the development ball may not be rewritten as the avoidance ball until the area 113B is reached. Of course, the development ball is rewritten as the avoidance ball at the time of the area 113E. Alternatively, the end of the CZ may be avoided by maintaining the developed ball even at the time of the area 113A and invalidating the transition lottery (C) itself.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 95 is an ART lottery table in CZ referred to in the transition lottery (C) to ART in CZ. The ART lottery table in CZ defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) for each presence or absence of winning in the CZ mode and BB. When referring to the ART lottery table during CZ, it can be seen that when the CZ mode is 0, the probability of winning the ART is low, and when the CZ mode is 1 or more, the probability of winning the ART is always low. In the CZ mode, it is sufficient if the probability of winning the ART in the transition lottery (C) and the degree of advantage of the ART at the time of winning the ART are larger, which is more advantageous to the player, and in the CZ modes 1 and 2, the winning of the ART is always achieved. There is no need to set it to.

[Game in BB]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the bonus state (also referred to as “in BB”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 101. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the type of winning combination managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side in the BB. Yes, FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game in the BB, and FIGS. 98 to 101 are data tables referred to in the BB. The data tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Correspondence between main side / sub side of winning role>
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a part of the correspondence between the type of winning combination managed on the main (main control circuit 91) side and the abbreviation of the winning combination managed on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side in the BB. is there. On the sub side, the winning combination on the main side is managed by the abbreviation shown in the correspondence table of FIG. 96. The correspondence relationship other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 96 is the same as that in FIG. 67.

<Outline of the flow of games during BB>
As shown in FIG. 97, the game in the BB is triggered by the operation of the BB. When the operation of BB is performed, the BB mode is set to 0. Here, the BB mode is information for setting the winning probability of ART in the transition lottery (F) to ART performed during BB. The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has BB modes 0 to 5 as BB modes, and the larger the value of the BB mode, the higher the probability of winning ART.

Subsequently, when the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts during the BB with the start operation, the transition lottery (F) to the ART performed at the start during the BB is performed. The transition lottery (F) at the start is irrespective of the above-mentioned BB mode, and when the abbreviation "7-matched lip" on the sub side is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART is won, and in other cases. Became a non-winner in ART.

Subsequently, a mode-up lottery for the BB mode is performed based on the internal winning combination in the BB. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a winning combination that may be mode-up is defined for each current BB mode. Details will be described later, but in Pachislot 1, the higher the BB mode, the fewer types of winning combinations that may be upgraded.

After that, when the medal is paid out according to the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the operation of the BB is terminated. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the BB ends when more than 59 medals are paid out during the BB. If more than 59 medals have not yet been paid out, the BB will continue to operate. On the other hand, when more than 59 medals are paid out, a lottery (F) for transition to ART at the end of BB is performed. The transition lottery (F) at the end is a lottery performed according to the BB mode, and the larger the value of the BB mode, the higher the winning probability of ART.

When BB ends in the state of winning ART, ART (enemy decision ART) starts from the next game. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, during the BB, the combination related to JACIN is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the state shifts to the high RT state (RT4 game state), and the symbol corresponding to the combination related to JACIN. When the combination of is displayed, it shifts to the low RT state (RT2 gaming state). Then, after the end of the BB, the RT gaming state during the BB is maintained, so that after the end of the BB, the high RT state or the low RT state is reached depending on the result of the game during the BB.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the BB ends in the state of winning the ART, the ART may be executed at the timing of the transition to the high RT state, and the ART may be executed regardless of the type of the RT gaming state. ART (more specifically AT) may be executed. That is, when the BB ends in the low RT state, the enemy determination ART may be started without waiting for the transition to the high RT state. In this case, the enemy decision ART has a low probability that the role related to the replay will be determined as the internal winning role, but it will notify the correct push order according to the push order role and will be recorded in the apocalypse according to the control during the enemy decision ART. A production ball is set. As will be described later, during the enemy decision ART, the HP of the ally character may increase as a result of the ally ball being set in the apocalypse, and if the HP of the ally character increases, the subsequent battle ART is won. The possibility of (continuing) increases. Even if the enemy decision ART is started in the low RT state, the player can be given the benefit of increasing the HP of the ally character (that is, the increase in the expectation of continuing the ART game state), so that the player remains in the low RT state. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player who has finished the BB.

<ART lottery table at the start during BB>
FIG. 98 is an ART lottery table at the start of the BB, which is referred to in the transition lottery (F) at the start of the BB. The ART lottery table at the start of BB is referred to when the abbreviation "7-matched lip" on the sub side is determined, and defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of transition to ART. As shown in FIG. 98, when the abbreviation "7-matched lip" on the sub side is determined, the ART is always won in the transition lottery (F) at the start.

Here, referring to the correspondence table of the winning combination shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC2 flags (the state in which JACIN2 is carried over as the internal winning combination) and between the JAC3 flags (the state in which JACIN3 is carried over as the internal winning combination), the main Only three of "F_312 upper 7-aligned" to "F_2nd cross 7-aligned" on the side are "7-aligned rips". On the other hand, between the JAC1 flags (in the state where JACIN1 is carried over as an internal winning combination), the main side "F_312 upper 7 alignment" to "F_2nd cross 7 alignment" and "F_J1 upper 7 lip" to "F_J1 cross 7" A total of 6 rips, including 3 rips, are 7 sets of rips. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the probability of winning ART in the transition lottery (F) at the start differs depending on the type of carry-over combination carried over during BB.

<Mode-up lottery table during BB>
99 and 100 are BB mode-up lottery tables referred to in the BB mode mode-up lottery. The mode-up lottery table during BB defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the mode-up lottery for each of the current BB mode and the internal winning combination.

Refer to the mode-up lottery table during BB, when the current BB mode is 0, if any of the push order bell, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry or champ is determined as the internal winning combination, BB The mode will go up. That is, there are six types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 0. Similarly, there are five types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 1, four types of winning combinations that may be mode-up from BB mode 2, and modes from BB mode 3. There are three types of winning combinations that may be upgraded, and there are two types of winning combinations that may be upgraded from BB mode 4.

In addition, the winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 4 is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 3, and similarly, the winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 3 is included. Is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 2, and the winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 2 is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 1. , The winning combination that may be mode-up from BB mode 1 is included in the winning combination that may be mode-up in BB mode 0.

In this way, in Pachislot 1, the higher the BB mode, the fewer types of winning combinations that may be upgraded, and the winning combinations that may be upgraded in a high BB mode are , There is a possibility that the mode will be upgraded even when the BB mode is low.

In the BB medium mode up lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 99 and 100, the BB mode can be skipped step by step instead of stepping up (for example, BB mode 0 to BB mode 1 without going through the BB mode). It is possible to upgrade to 2 or more). In this respect, the BB mode may be configured such that the mode-up lottery table during BB is always mode-up only one step at a time. According to such a configuration, since the BB mode can be raised only one step at a time, the degree of expectation during stay in each BB mode is lowered, so that the BB mode can be skipped and raised, as compared with the case where the BB mode can be skipped. Can be set to increase the degree of expectation that will increase. As a result, it becomes easy to go up to a certain BB mode in BB, so it becomes easy to create a game form in which the BB mode gradually goes up.

Here, referring to the mode-up lottery table in BB shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, when the internal winning combination is a change, the BB mode tends to rise. Further, referring to the correspondence table of the winning combination shown in FIG. 96, between the JAC1 flags and the JAC3 flags, only five "F_J3 chance rips 1" to "F_J3 cherry rips" on the main side are "chan rips". On the other hand, between the JAC2 flags, there are a total of 10 "Chanlip", which is the main side "F_J3 Chance Lip 1" to "F_J3 Cherry Lip" plus 5 "F_J2 Chance Lip 1" to "F_J2 Cherry Lip". "It has become. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the probability of raising the BB mode differs depending on the type of carry-over role carried over during BB, and as a result, the transition at the end of BB depends on the type of carry-over role carried over during BB. The probability of winning ART in the lottery (F) will be different.

<ART lottery table at the end of BB>
FIG. 101 is an ART lottery table at the end of BB, which is referred to in the transition lottery (F) at the end of BB. The ART lottery table at the end of the BB defines the lottery value information for the transition lottery result to the ART for each state in the BB and the BB mode. The ART lottery table at the end of BB in FIG. 101 (A) is referred to in the game states "RB game state in bonus state" and "RT4 game state in bonus state" on the main side, and the BB in FIG. 101 (B). The ART lottery table at the end is referred to in the game states "RT0 game state in the bonus state" and "RT2 game state in the bonus state" on the main side (see FIG. 17).

[Game during ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the ART game state (also referred to as “during ART”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 121. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram of the flow of the game during the enemy determination ART, FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game during the battle ART, and FIGS. 104 to 121 are referred to during the ART. Data table. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 121 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

<Outline of the flow of games during ART>
As shown in FIG. 102, when the transition lottery to ART is won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state, high probability gaming state, CZ) or bonus state, the sub-control circuit 101 responds to the situation in which the transition lottery is won. Lottery the ART status. The ART state is a state in which the degree of expectation for the continuation of the ART gaming state is different, and basically, the larger the numerical value of the ART state, the easier it is for the ART to continue (advantageous for the player). When the ART state is determined and the game state on the main side shifts to the RT4 game state in which the bonus is not won, the enemy decision ART starts.

When the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts with the start operation during the enemy decision ART, the production balls to be set in the apocalypse are drawn. In the enemy decision ART, directing balls such as boss balls 1 to 8 for determining the enemy character to fight during the battle ART and ally balls for increasing the HP of the ally character will be set in the apocalypse. .. The ART state determined before the start of the enemy decision ART is referred to in the lottery of the production balls, and the larger the numerical value of the ART state, the more boss balls that the ally character can easily win will be set in the apocalypse.

The lottery of the effect balls will be performed based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP described later and the ART state. During the enemy decision ART, the boss MAP "1" is set first, and then the boss MAP with a larger numerical value is set as the same enemy decision ART continues.

If the boss ball is set in the apocalypse immediately after the start of the enemy decision ART, there is a possibility that the enemy decision ART will end immediately after the start. Therefore, at the start of the enemy decision ART, the guaranteed number of times that the production ball is not set in the apocalypse may be set. By doing so, since the enemy determination ART continues for the minimum guaranteed number of times, it is possible to prevent the enemy determination ART from ending immediately after the start. The guaranteed number of times may be a predetermined fixed number of times (for example, 5 games), or may be determined by lottery at the start of the enemy determination ART. Also, if the number of guarantees is different between the enemy decision ART (so-called first hit) that started when the lottery for transition to ART was won and the enemy decision ART that started when the ART game state continued. You may let it. In this case as well, the fixed guaranteed number of times may be different in both cases, and the lottery probability of the guaranteed number of times may be different in both cases. Further, when the ART game state continues, the guaranteed number of times may be different depending on the type of the enemy character who fought in the battle ART at the time of continuation. In this case as well, the fixed guaranteed number of times may be different depending on the type of enemy character who fought in the battle ART during the continuation, or the lottery probability of the guaranteed number of times may be different.

Then, the HP of the ally character is determined. It will be used in the battle ART where the HP of the ally character determined here continues. The HP of the ally character is determined based on the initial determination made in the first game of the enemy determination ART and the additional lottery described later when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse.

The initial determination differs depending on whether or not the HP of the current ally character is less than the initial value (HP50), and the sub-control circuit 101 initializes the HP of the ally character when it is less than the initial value. The value is determined, and if it is equal to or higher than the initial value, the HP of the current ally character is maintained as it is. In Pachislot 1, if an ally character wins in the battle ART, the enemy decision ART is performed again. At this time, since the HP of the ally character fluctuates according to the result of the continuous ART (for example, the HP increase due to the ally ball (additional lottery) during the enemy determination ART of the continuous ART, or the battle ART of the continuous ART). HP reduction due to the enemy ball (enemy attack) inside), in the new enemy decision ART after continuation, the HP of the ally character will be set according to the fluctuation from the initial value.

Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 controls according to the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. For example, when the boss ball is set, it is determined whether or not the push order bell (which may include the common bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the pushing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the boss according to the type of boss ball set in the apocalypse in this game is determined as the opponent in the battle ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the opponent determining means, and determines the opponent in the battle ART according to the boss balls 1 to 8 set in the apocalypse in this game.

When the opponent of the battle ART is determined in this way, the HP of the enemy character to be the opponent is determined. The HP of the enemy character is determined based on the internal winning combination of the next game in which the opponent is determined. For example, when the rare role is determined as the internal winning combination, the HP of the enemy character is reduced. Will be decided. When the opponent is decided in the enemy deciding ART (pushing order bell winning at the time of the boss ball) and the HP of the enemy character is decided (internal winning role of the next game), the enemy deciding ART ends and from the next game Battle ART will start. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state start means, and determines the HP of the opponent and the enemy character of the opponent based on the boss ball set during the enemy determination ART. , End the enemy decision ART and start the battle ART from the next game.

On the other hand, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a ally ball, the sub-control circuit 101 performs an additional lottery of the ally character's HP. In this additional lottery, the HP of the ally character is increased (added) based on the internal winning combination. Specifically, in this game, when a ally ball is set in the apocalypse, the ally character's HP will increase by winning the extra lottery with "bell win" or higher. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical value adding means, and when a ally ball is set in the apocalypse, the ally character's HP is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery result is obtained. The HP of the ally character is increased (added) based on. In addition, "bell winning" means that the push order bell or common bell is determined as the internal winning role, and "bell winning" or higher means "bell winning", pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong. Either a rare role, such as Cherry or Chanlip, is determined as an internal winning role.

As shown in FIG. 102, the enemy determination ART is repeated until the opponent is determined. On the other hand, when the opponent is determined in the enemy determination ART and the HP of the enemy character is determined, the enemy determination ART ends and the battle ART starts from the next game. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the first advantageous state control means, determines the enemy character to compete during the battle ART, determines the HP of the ally character, and draws an additional lot when the ART continues. And so on.

As shown in FIG. 103, when the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts with the start operation during the battle ART, the production balls to be set in the apocalypse are drawn. In the battle ART, directing balls such as ally balls, enemy balls, and awakening balls for determining the character to attack will be set in the apocalypse. As will be described later, parameters such as attack power, defense power, and speed are set for each enemy character, and the lottery of the effect ball is performed according to the speed of the enemy character. Specifically, the faster the enemy character, the higher the probability that the enemy ball will be drawn, and the slower the speed, the higher the probability that the ally ball will be drawn.

Subsequently, during the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed based on the internal winning role and the production ball set in the apocalypse. Specifically, if the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a ally ball or an awakening ball, the ally character attacks the enemy character with "Bell Win" or higher, and the enemy character's HP Decreases. In addition, the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the awakening ball, and in the case of "Bell winning" or higher, the ally ball is stocked, and the enemy ball set in the apocalypse is the amount stocked. Rewritten as a ally ball.

On the other hand, if the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the enemy character attacks the ally character with "Bell Win", the HP of the ally character decreases, and the "rare role" In "Winning", the ally character attacks the enemy character, and the HP of the enemy character decreases. In addition, the "rare role winning" means that any of the rare roles such as pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and champ is determined as the internal winning role.

Here, the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character when attacking the enemy character differs according to the attack power set for the enemy character, and the higher the attack power of the enemy character, the greater the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character, and the attack power is higher. The lower the enemy character, the smaller the decrease in HP of the ally character. Similarly, the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character when attacking a friendly character differs depending on the defense power set for the enemy character, and the higher the defense power, the smaller the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character and the greater the defense power. The lower the enemy character, the greater the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a numerical subtraction means, and reduces the HP of the ally character when the effect ball set in the apocalypse during the battle ART is an enemy ball (third effect information). (Subtract) and reduce (subtract) the HP of the enemy character in the case of a friendly ball (fourth effect information).

As shown in FIG. 103, the battle ART ends when the HP of either the ally character or the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle. Specifically, when the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the battle ART ends and the ART game state for one set ends. On the other hand, when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0, the battle ART ends without changing the number of sets in the ART game state. Then, if the number of sets in the ART game state remains at the end of the battle ART, the ART game state continues, and the battle ART shifts to a new enemy determination ART. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the second advantageous state control means and the advantageous state control means, and sets the effect ball attacked by the enemy character during the battle ART in the apocalypse, the ally character and the enemy character. Controls the transition to the enemy determination ART by the battle with, the end of the ART game state based on the result of the battle, or the continuation of the ART game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a continuous control means, and when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 as a result of the battle, or when the HP of the ally character becomes 0, it is in the ART gaming state. When the number of sets remains, the ART game state is continued, and the game state is shifted from the battle ART to the enemy determination ART.

<ART state lottery table>
FIG. 104 is an ART state lottery table referred to for drawing the ART state at the time of winning the transition lottery to ART. The ART status lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the ART status for each situation when the transition lottery to ART is won. For example, in the case of winning in the transition lottery (A) (D) to ART performed during the normal game state and the high probability game state, refer to the ART state lottery table in the "normal game state, high probability game state" column. Then, the ART state is drawn. Similarly, when winning in the transition lottery (C) to ART in CZ, the ART state is drawn by referring to the ART state lottery table corresponding to the CZ mode in CZ. Further, when the winning is won in the transition lottery (F) to the ART in the bonus state, the ART state is drawn by referring to the ART state lottery table in the "bonus state column".

With reference to FIG. 104, when the transition lottery is won in the CZ mode 2, the ART state having a large numerical value is drawn as compared with the case where the transition lottery is won in the CZ modes 0 and 1 and other cases. Become. Here, the CZ mode 2 is the CZ mode when the vehicle completes the CZ, and the ART state is set to the CZ because the larger the numerical value is, the more advantageous the ART is for the player (the state in which the ART is easy to continue). It can be seen that when the race is completed, it is not only a transition to ART but also a more advantageous state for the player.

<Various data tables referenced during enemy decision ART>
Subsequently, various data tables referred to during the enemy determination ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 111.

<Boss MAP lottery table>
FIG. 105 is a boss MAP lottery table for drawing a boss MAP for determining a production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. During the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP "1" is set first, and then a new boss MAP is drawn when the boss MAP data specified for each boss MAP is 0. The boss MAP lottery table of FIG. 105 is a table referred to for drawing a new boss MAP when the boss MAP data is 0.

With reference to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, it can be seen that in the pachislot machine 1, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is easily drawn every time the boss MAP is drawn. Specifically, the boss MAP "3" is likely to be drawn from the boss MAP "1", and similarly, the boss MAP "5" is likely to be drawn from the boss MAP "3". On the other hand, when the boss MAP "4" is drawn from the boss MAP "1", the boss MAP "3" is easily drawn from the boss MAP "4", so that the value of the boss MAP becomes small once. However, since the boss MAP "5" is drawn from the subsequent boss MAP "3", as a result, the boss MAP having a large numerical value is drawn every time the boss MAP is drawn.

Further, referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105, if the boss MAP is updated to the boss MAP "52" as a result of repeated lottery of the boss MAP, then the boss MAP "52" or the boss MAP It can be seen that only one of "53" is drawn and the other boss MAPs are not drawn. As will be described in detail later, when these boss MAPs "52" and "53" are set as boss MAPs, the effect balls that are advantageous to the player are determined as the effect balls to be set in the apocalypse. Therefore, it can be said that the boss MAPs "52" and "53" set as a result of repeated lottery of the boss MAP are the ceilings of the boss MAPs, and when they reach the ceilings of the boss MAPs, the effect is advantageous for the player. The ball will be set in the apocalypse.

<Boss MAP data correspondence table>
The boss MAP defines the boss MAP data for determining the production ball to be set in the apocalypse. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of boss MAP data defined for each boss MAP. As shown in FIG. 106, the boss MAP1 is defined with the boss MAP data "1" from the first to fourth games, and the boss MAP data "0" is defined in the fifth game. When the boss MAP data "0" is specified, a new boss MAP is drawn by referring to the boss MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 105.

<Enemy decision ART production ball lottery table>
FIGS. 107 and 108 are a production ball lottery table during the enemy determination ART for determining the production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the enemy determination ART. The effect ball lottery table during ART defines the boss MAP data and the lottery value information for the effect balls set for each ART state. In FIG. 107 (A), information on the lottery value for the effect ball is specified for the boss MAP data "0", but the boss is newer than the lottery for the effect ball based on the MAP data "0". If priority is given to the lottery of MAP, it will not be used.

With reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, when the boss MAP data is "1", "2", and "4", the lottery effect balls are generally constant regardless of the ART state, while the boss MAP data "3". In the case of ", the effect balls to be drawn differ greatly depending on the ART state. For example, referring to the ART state "28" or higher in the case of the boss MAP data "3", it can be seen that either the boss balls 7 or 8 are determined as the effect balls. The boss balls 7 and 8 are production balls that determine the continuation of the battle ART when the opponent is determined (see FIG. 68). Further, referring to the boss MAP data correspondence table shown in FIG. 106, it can be seen that the boss MAP data "3" is defined in many boss MAPs, and in many cases, the effect ball is based on the boss MAP data "3". Can be seen to be drawn.

From this, it can be seen that the larger the value of the ART state is, the more advantageous the ART is for the player, and since "28" or more is drawn as the ART state when the CZ is completed (see FIG. 104), the CZ is completed. It can be seen that the transitioning ART is easy to continue.

Further, referring to FIGS. 106 and 107, when the boss MAP is "52", "4" is defined as the boss MAP data, and any of the boss balls 7 and 8 for which the continuation of the battle ART is confirmed is determined. It can be seen that it is decided as a production ball. Similarly, when the boss MAP is "53", "2" is defined as the boss MAP data, and it can be seen that the ally ball that increases the physical strength (HP) of the ally character is determined as the effect ball.

As described above in FIG. 105, the boss MAPs "52" and "53" are the ceilings of the boss MAPs that are set when the lottery of the boss MAPs is repeated. Then, when the ceiling of the boss MAP is reached, only the boss balls 7 and 8 whose continuation is confirmed or the ally balls that increase the HP of the ally character will be set in the apocalypse, and the subsequent ART will be easy to continue. It turns out that That is, in the present embodiment, the boss MAP lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 defines the boss MAP data (lottery value information) for determining the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART. A lottery information storage means for storing a plurality of MAPs (lottery information) is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery information determining means, determines the boss MAP with reference to the boss MAP lottery table, and determines the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse based on the boss MAP. Then, the boss MAP is updated to another boss MAP.

<Enemy decision ART production ball upgrade lottery table>
FIG. 109 is a production ball upgrade lottery table during the enemy determination ART, which is referred to for rewriting the enemy ball set in the apocalypse to the ally ball during the enemy determination ART. The lottery table for upgrading the production balls during the enemy decision ART defines the lottery value information for the number of stocks of ally balls for each internal winning combination. When the stock of one or more ally balls is determined by this lottery, the boss balls are rewritten as ally balls by the amount corresponding to the number of stocks. The timing of rewriting the boss ball to the ally ball is arbitrary. With reference to FIG. 109, if a rare role (pure off, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, champ) is determined as an internal winning role during the enemy decision ART, the ally ball is stocked.

(Rewriting to ally ball)
Here, an operation example when rewriting the boss ball into a ally ball will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation when rewriting a boss ball into a ally ball during an enemy determination ART.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the current game, the sub RAM 103 has a boss ball 1 in the storage area "1", a boss ball 2 in the storage area "2", a boss ball 1 in the storage area "3", and a storage area. The boss ball 4 is stored in "4", the ally ball is stored in the storage area "5", and the boss ball 3 is stored in the storage area "6". As described above, the effect balls stored in the storage areas "1" to "5" of the sub RAM 103 are set (displayed) in the apocalypse and stored in the storage area "6" of the sub RAM 103. The ball is not set in the apocalypse (hidden).

When the rewriting to the ally ball is not performed (the stock of the ally ball is "0"), as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect ball stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103 slides, and as a result, the next The effect balls stored in the game storage areas "2" to "6" are stored in the game storage areas "1" to "5", and the lottery is stored in the game storage areas "6". The produced production ball is newly memorized.

On the other hand, if there is a stock of ally balls, the boss balls stored in the sub RAM 103 are rewritten as ally balls. FIG. 155 (b) is an example of rewriting the boss ball when the stock of the ally ball is “2”. If the stock of ally balls is "2", the two boss balls are rewritten as ally balls. Since the effect ball stored in the storage area "1" of the current game does not exist in the next game, in the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), it is stored in the storage areas "2" and "3" of the current game. The two boss balls that are there have been rewritten as ally balls in the next game.

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (b), the boss ball on the front side (the storage area "1" side of the storage areas "1" to "6") is rewritten in order from the boss ball to the ally ball. The method of determining the boss ball is arbitrary. For example, the boss balls 1 to 8 may be prioritized, and the boss balls to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority. It is also preferable to set this priority based on, for example, the degree of continuation expectation of battle ART. That is, the continuation expectation of the battle ART may be set for each of the boss balls 1 to 8, and the boss balls to be rewritten in order from the boss ball having the lowest (or higher) continuation expectation may be determined.

It is also preferable to set the priority based on the number of ally balls in stock. For example, when the number of stocks of ally balls is a predetermined number (for example, "1"), the boss balls to be rewritten are determined based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8. When the number of stocks of ally balls is a specific number (for example, "2"), the boss balls to be rewritten are determined based on the second priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8.

It is also preferable to set the priority based on the internal winning combination when the ally ball is stocked. For example, when a ally ball is stocked when a predetermined combination (for example, a watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, it is based on the first priority set for the boss balls 1 to 8. When the boss ball to be rewritten is decided and the ally ball is stocked when the specific role (for example, chance lip) is decided as the internal winning role, the boss balls 1 to 8 are used. The target boss ball to be rewritten is determined based on the set second priority.

By rewriting the boss ball to the ally ball according to the stock of the ally ball, the HP of the ally character increases, and it becomes difficult for the HP of the ally character to become "0" in the battle ART, and as a result, the battle ART is easy to continue. Become. Here, as described above, the boss balls 7 and 8 are boss balls whose continuation of the battle ART is confirmed, and if they are rewritten as ally balls, it will be difficult for the battle ART to continue. Therefore, the boss balls 7 and 8 may be maintained without being rewritten as ally balls. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the specific combination rewriting means, and when the rare combination wins internally, the boss ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten as a boss ball, and the target boss ball is a boss ball. If it is 7 or 8, it is maintained without being rewritten as a ally ball. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 determines the boss ball to be rewritten in the first priority based on the internal winning of the predetermined combination, and rewrites in the second priority based on the internal winning of the specific combination. Determine the target boss ball.

FIG. 155 (c) is a diagram showing an example of rewriting the boss ball when the boss ball 7 or the boss ball 8 is stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 103. In FIG. 155 (c), the stock of ally balls is "2", and in the storage areas "1" to "6" of the current game, boss ball 1, boss ball 7, boss ball 1, boss ball 4, respectively. The ally ball and the boss ball 3 are memorized. When rewriting from the boss ball on the front side to the ally ball in order, the boss ball 7 and the boss ball 1 stored in the storage areas "2" and "3" are determined as the boss balls to be rewritten. In this case, the boss ball 1 is rewritten as a ally ball, while the boss ball 7 is maintained without being rewritten as a ally ball.

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), with respect to the boss ball 7 to be rewritten, the boss ball 7 is maintained while the ally ball is inserted in front of the boss ball 7. As a result, the ally ball inserted in front of the boss ball 7 to be rewritten is stored in the storage area "1" of the next game, and the boss ball 7 is maintained as it is in the storage area "2" of the next game. Will be done. Then, the ally balls rewritten from the boss ball 1 are stored in the storage area "3" of the next game, and the storage areas "4" to "6" of the current game are stored in the storage areas "4" to "6" of the next game. A production ball with the same content as "6" is stored.

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (c), the boss ball 7 is determined as the boss ball to be rewritten, and the boss ball 7 or 8 is confirmed to continue the battle ART by inserting the ally ball in front of the boss ball 7. However, the boss balls 7 and 8 may not be determined as the boss balls to be rewritten in the first place.

It is disadvantageous for the player that the boss ball whose continuation is confirmed is rewritten to the ally ball, so by maintaining such a boss ball without rewriting, the player will not be dissatisfied. Suitable. Note that the production ball stored in the storage area "6" is not set in the apocalypse and is hidden, so even if it is a boss ball whose continuation is confirmed, it can be rewritten as a ally ball. Good. This is because the player cannot grasp such a hidden production ball, and the player does not feel dissatisfied even if the boss ball whose continuation is confirmed is rewritten as a ally ball.

<Enemy decision ART medium ally power addition lottery table>
FIG. 110 is an enemy determination ART medium ally power addition lottery table referred to at the time of the ally character's HP addition lottery performed when the production ball set in the apocalypse is a ally ball in this game. The lottery table for adding power to allies in the enemy determination ART defines the amount of HP added to the ally character for each internal winning combination. With reference to FIG. 110, it can be seen that when the ally ball is set in the apocalypse in this game, the HP of the ally character increases by "bell winning" or higher.

<Boss power lottery table during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 111 is a boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART that is referred to when determining the HP of the enemy character in the next game in which the enemy character of the opponent is determined. The boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART defines the lottery value information for the HP of the enemy character for each internal winning combination. With reference to FIG. 111, it can be seen that the HP of the enemy character is determined to be reduced when the rare role other than the pure outlier is won. The boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART may be a table common to all enemy characters that are opponents, or a different table may be provided for each enemy character. By providing a different table for each enemy character, it is possible to determine the HP according to the individuality of the enemy character.

<Various data tables referenced during battle ART>
Subsequently, various data tables referred to during the battle ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 121, but prior to the description of these data tables, the characteristics of each enemy character will be described.

<Boss status correspondence table>
FIG. 112 is a boss status correspondence table. Statuses such as attack power, defense power, and speed are set for each of bosses 1 to 8 which are enemy characters of the opponent. For example, boss 1 is an attack type, and while its attack power is high, its speed is slow. On the other hand, the boss 5 is a speed type, and although the attack power is low, the speed is high. During the battle ART, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed according to the characteristics of the enemy character.

The bosses 7 and 8 are enemy characters whose continuation of the ART gaming state is confirmed when they are determined as opponents. As described above, in the ART game state, the number of sets of the ART game state remains even if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the ally character becomes 0, or even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0. If so, continue. The mode in which the ART game state continues when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined is arbitrary. For example, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as the enemy character, the HP of the enemy character always becomes 0 before the ally character. Also, when bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the number of sets in the ART game state is always 1 or more (for example, bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters). In this case, the number of sets in the ART game state may be added by 1, or the number of sets in the ART game state may not be subtracted even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0). In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the bosses 7 and 8 are determined as enemy characters, the number of sets in the ART game state is added by 1, so that even if the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the ART game state By making sure that the number of sets of bosses remains, the ART game state will be continued when the bosses 7 and 8 are decided. Although detailed description is omitted, when the HP of the bosses 7 and 8 can be set to 0 in the present embodiment, the transition to the so-called additional special zone may be performed. The type of the additional special zone is arbitrary, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is conceivable to add the number of sets in the ART gaming state or to add the HP of the ally character as the additional special zone.

<Battle MAP lottery table>
FIGS. 113 to 115 are battle MAP lottery tables for drawing a battle MAP for determining a production ball to be set in the apocalypse in the battle ART. The battle MAP lottery table is provided for each type of enemy character that is the opponent, and the information of the lottery value for the battle MAP of the migration destination is defined for each battle MAP of the migration source. FIG. 113 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 1, FIG. 114 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 2, and FIG. 115 is a battle MAP lottery table corresponding to the boss 5. As will be described later, the lottery value information defined in the battle MAP lottery table depends on the speed set for the enemy character.

<Battle MAP data correspondence table>
In the battle MAP, the battle MAP data for determining the production ball to be set in the apocalypse is defined. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of battle MAP data defined in each battle MAP.

<Production ball lottery table during battle ART>
FIG. 117 is a production ball lottery table during battle ART for determining the production balls to be set in the apocalypse in battle ART. The production ball lottery table during the battle defines the information of the lottery value for the production ball set for each battle MAP data. In addition, in (A) of FIG. 117, the information of the lottery value for the production ball is defined for the battle MAP data "0", but the boss is newer than the lottery of the production ball based on the MAP data "0". If priority is given to the lottery of MAP, it will not be used.

With reference to FIG. 117, the battle MAP data "1" is likely to be drawn for enemy balls, while the battle MAP data "2" and "3" are always drawn for ally balls and awakening balls. Further, referring to the battle MAP data comparison table shown in FIG. 116, it can be seen that seven battle MAPs are in one set. Specifically, referring to battle MAPs "1" to "7", the battle MAP data is followed by five "1" s, followed by "2" and "3", followed by battle MAPs "8" to "14", It can be seen that the same applies to the battle MAPs “15” to “21” and the battle MAPs “22” to “28”.

The battle MAPs "4", "11", "18", and "25" are battle MAPs that are not actually drawn (the lottery value is 0 as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115). Therefore, in pachislot 1, four battle MAPs (one is not drawn) and battle MAP data "2" in which ally balls or awakening balls are always drawn are defined as battle MAP data "1" in which enemy balls are easily drawn. Six battle MAPs with "3" specified are included in one set.

Here, the process returns to the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIGS. 113 to 115. At the battle MAP lottery table, battle MAP data "2" and "3" are defined, in which ally balls or awakening balls are always drawn. Battle MAPs "6" "7" "13" "14" "20" "21" " "27" and "28" are emphasized and displayed. With reference to the battle MAP lottery table, the battle MAP basically shifts to a battle MAP with a large number one by one in one set, or allies or awakening balls in one set are always drawn. You can see that it will shift to battle MAP. Specifically, from the battle MAP "1", the battle MAP "2" whose numerical value is one larger, or the battle MAP "6" in which the ally ball or the awakening ball in the same set is always drawn is likely to be drawn. I understand.

By configuring the battle MAP and the battle MAP data in this way, in the pachislot 1, the number of times the enemy character attacks continuously is suppressed to a predetermined number of times (4 times in this embodiment). That is, when the battle MAP is transferred more than a predetermined number of times (five times in this embodiment), the battle MAP is always transferred to the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is drawn at least once. In addition, from battle MAP "1", it will also shift to battle MAP "9" etc., but since battle MAP "9" etc. is the second numerical value battle MAP in the same set, the transition of battle MAP will be done. If the number of times exceeds a predetermined number, the battle MAP will be transferred to the battle MAP in which allies and the like are always drawn.

Further, by comparing the battle MAP lottery tables of FIGS. 113 to 115, it can be seen that the probability of shifting to the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always drawn differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. For example, when the attack type and slow speed boss 1 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 113, the battle MAPs "6" and "7" in which ally balls and the like are always drawn are selected. It can be seen that it is relatively easy to migrate. Further, when the boss 2 (see FIG. 112), which is a defensive type and has a normal speed, is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 114, the battle MAP " It turns out that it is difficult to shift to "6" and "7". Similarly, when the speed type boss 5 (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, referring to the battle MAP lottery table in FIG. 115, allies and the like are always drawn. It can be seen that it is difficult to shift to the battle MAPs "6" and "7" to be performed, and basically, the battle MAPs with larger numerical values are shifted from the battle MAP "1".

In this way, in the battle MAP lottery table, information on the lottery value is defined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, during battle ART, directing balls are set based on the speed set for the enemy character, the faster the enemy, the more enemy balls are set, and the slower the speed, the more ally balls are set. Become.

<Damage lottery table during battle ART>
FIGS. 118 and 119 are damage lottery tables during battle ART used when reducing the HP of enemy characters and ally characters in battle ART. The damage lottery table during battle ART is about the type of enemy character to be the opponent, the type of production ball set in the apocalypse in this game, and the amount of HP reduction of the enemy character and ally character for each internal winning role. Specify the lottery value information.

FIG. 118 is a damage lottery table during battle ART used when the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball. In FIG. 118, in order to make it possible to compare the difference depending on the status (attack power) of the enemy character, the damage lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 1 with high attack power (see FIG. 112) is the enemy character is shown in FIG. 118. The damage lottery table during battle ART, which is used when the boss 5 with low attack power (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character, is shown in FIG. 118 (B). Comparing the damage lottery table during battle ART in FIG. 118, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, when the opponent is boss 1, "15" is likely to be determined as the amount of HP reduction of the ally character. On the other hand, when the opponent is the boss 5, it can be seen that "5" is easily determined as the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character.

In addition, referring to FIG. 118, even if the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, if the player wins a rare role other than the pure outlier, the enemy character is not the ally character. HP will decrease. By configuring the damage lottery table during battle ART in this way, the player expects that the rare role will be decided as the internal winning role during battle ART, and can enhance the interest during ART. ..

Further, FIG. 119 is a damage lottery table during battle ART used when the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a ally ball or an awakening ball. In FIG. 119, in order to make it possible to compare the difference due to the status (defense power) of the enemy character, the damage lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 1 with high defense power (see FIG. 112) is the enemy character is shown in FIG. 119. The damage lottery table during battle ART used when the boss 5 with low defense power (see FIG. 112) is an enemy character is shown in (A) of FIG. 119 (B). Comparing the damage lottery table during battle ART in FIG. 119, when the opponent is boss 1, it is easy to determine "5" as the amount of decrease in HP of the enemy character, while when the opponent is boss 5, the enemy character It can be seen that "10" or the like is easily determined as the amount of decrease in HP of.

By providing a damage lottery table during battle ART according to the type of enemy character that is the opponent in this way, the status (attack power and defense power) of the enemy character can be reflected, and the games during battle ART can be varied. Can be transformed into.

<ART state lottery table>
FIGS. 120 and 121 are ART state lottery tables for drawing a new ART state when it is decided to continue to ART in the battle ART. The ART state lottery table defines information on the type of the opponent's enemy character, the number of times ART is continued, and the lottery value for the transfer destination ART state for each transfer source ART state. Note that FIGS. 120 and 121 show an ART state lottery table that is referred to when the opponent character is any of the bosses 1 to 6. When the enemy character of the opponent is any of the bosses 1 to 6, and the ART state of the migration source is "31" to "33", the same ART status is determined as the ART status of the migration destination. On the other hand, when the enemy character of the opponent is either boss 7 or 8, and the ART state of the migration source is "31" to "33", although not shown, a different ART state (for example, ART state "3") "Etc.) will be determined as the ART state of the migration destination.

Further, referring to FIGS. 120 and 121, it can be seen that when the number of times of ART continuation exceeds 5, it becomes easy to shift to the ART state having a large numerical value.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 122 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs the power-on processing (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area that requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 64 are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S6). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S11.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production of the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs wait processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 waits until the wait time elapses when the elapsed time from the start of the previous game has not elapsed a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors is controlled by the interrupt process (see FIG. 127 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and the left The rotation of the reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S11). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed, respectively, using the reel stop control information determined in S6.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 collates the symbol combination displayed on the winning line after all the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped with the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 20 to 32). .. Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination (combination) defined by the symbol combination table is displayed on the winning line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S13). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the combination of symbols determined in S12. Further, in this process, when the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is on, the payout number is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a counting means and updates (subtracts) the bonus end number counter based on the payout number determined according to the combination of symbols displayed in the bonus state. ..

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation / storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and provides the main RAM 95 together with additional data (combination of displayed symbols, value of payout number, bonus end number counter, etc.). Save in the saved communication data storage area. Further, the winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game by referring to various counters (not shown) for managing the end trigger of the bonus game provided in the main RAM 95. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an RT check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the RT game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols. The RT check process is a process for updating the RT game state in the bonus non-operating state, and is omitted in the bonus state and the inter-flag state. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S31). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62), and sets an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 33 to 37) according to the grasped game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S32). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S33). The winning number is information assigned to each winning combination that may be drawn at the internal lottery table. For example, when the game state is the RT0 game state during the bonus non-winning, the winning number "1" is attached to "missing" and the winning number "2" is attached to "F_black black black". (See FIG. 33). Further, when the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in the bonus state, the winning number "1" is attached to "F_maintenance lip" and the winning number "2" is attached to "F_123 lip". (See FIG. 35).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S33 is less than 0 (negative value) (S34).

In S34, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S35). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by 1.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S36). When it is determined in S36 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S33 and repeats the processes after S33.

On the other hand, in S36, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the data pointer (S37). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S34 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S34 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (YES), the main CPU 93 determines according to the current winning number. , Acquire the data pointer for small role / replay and the data pointer for bonus (S38).

Then, after the processing of S37 or S38, the main CPU 93 acquires the internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S39).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S40).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S41). In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S48 described later.

On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer. (S42).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S43).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination related to BB is being carried over (S44). With reference to FIG. 60, the combination related to BB is stored in either bits 2 to 7 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 or bit 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is stored in either the bits 2 to 7 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 or the bit 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 2. When it is determined in S44 that the main CPU 93 is not carrying over the winning combination related to BB (NO), the main CPU 93 moves to the process of S46.

On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to BB is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT5 game state flag to ON (S45), and then proceeds to the process of S46. Specifically, "1" is set in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). By this process, when the winning combination related to BB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus non-winning state, the gaming state can be shifted to the RT5 gaming state in the inter-flag state.

Next, in the process of S46, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination related to JACIN is being carried over. With reference to FIG. 60, the combination related to JACIN is stored in any of bits 1 to 3 of the carry-over combination storage area 2. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is stored in any of bits 1 to 3 of the carry-over combination storage area 2. In S46, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to JACIN is not being carried over (NO), the main CPU 93 moves to the process of S48.

On the other hand, in S46, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to JACIN is being carried over (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 game state flag on (S47), and then proceeds to the process of S48. Specifically, "1" is set in bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62). In addition, since the winning combination related to JACIN may be determined as the internal winning combination only during the bonus state, when the winning combination related to JACIN is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the game The state can be changed to the RT4 game state of the bonus state.

Next, in the process of S48, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "BB" is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) (S51). When the main CPU 93 determines in S51 that "BB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 93 determines that "BB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S52). ). If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 59 during the bonus state.

In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and "RB". Determines whether or not is in operation (S53). In S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, in S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 performs RB end processing (S54). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the winning counter and the game counter, and turns off the game state flag (RB game state flag) corresponding to the operating “RB”. Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 game state flag (S55).

Next, in S56, the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end processing. In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "BB". As shown in S53 to S56, when the operation of the BB (bonus state) ends during the RB game state, the state shifts to the RT2 game state in the bonus non-winning state after the end of the BB. On the other hand, when the operation of the BB ends in a state other than the RB game state, the state shifts to the bonus non-winning state while the RT game state in the bonus state is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S57). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has ended, and can perform a predetermined effect at the end of the bonus. After the process of S57, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) and "RB". Is in operation (S58). In S58, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RB" is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S58, when the main CPU 93 determines that "RB" is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning counter or the game counter is "0". (S59). If the winning count counter is "0", it means that the combination of symbols other than "missing" is displayed eight times during the RB game state in the bonus state, and the game counter is "0". If is, it means that 12 games have been played in the RB game state in the bonus state.

In S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that neither the winning counter nor the gameable counter is “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. (Refer to 122), move to S16.

On the other hand, in S59, when the main CPU 93 determines that either the winning counter or the game counter is "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the RB end processing (S60). Next, the main CPU 93 turns on the RT2 game state flag (S61), ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the profit state end means, and the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" when the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is on. By executing the bonus end processing with this as an opportunity, the bonus end number counter is cleared and the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area corresponding to the operating "BB" is turned off.

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of symbols related to "BB" (see FIG. 38) is displayed (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of the symbols related to "BB" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus operation time processing (S72). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the BB game state flag of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to ON, and sets "59" to the bonus end number counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT5 game state flag of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to off (S73). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S74). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of the bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and is main together with additional data (RT game status flag, winning count, game play count, bonus end count counter value, etc.). It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the RAM 95. Further, the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 127. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize that the bonus state has started, and can perform a predetermined effect at the start of the bonus.

When the process of S74 is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols related to "BB" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 displays the combination of symbols related to "JACIN" (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not it is present (S75). In S75, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols related to "JACIN" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 performs the RB operation time process (S76). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the RB game state flag of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to on, sets “8” in the winning counter, and sets “12” in the game counter. ..

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the RT4 game state flag of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 62) to off (S77). When the process of S77 is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S75, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols related to "JACIN" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed. (S78). In S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols related to "replay" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 122). Move to S17.

On the other hand, in S78, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S79). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 122). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the profit state start means, and when the combination of the symbols related to "BB" is displayed, the BB game state flag in the game state flag storage area is set to ON. , Set "59" to the bonus end number counter. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a profit control means that executes a bonus end check process and a bonus operation check process.

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is one of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (S81). .. In S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in any of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main The CPU 93 shifts to the process of S85 described later.

On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is in any of the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, and the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (YES). ), The main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the "bell spilled eye" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed (S82). When the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that neither the "bell spilled eye" nor the "RT1 transition lip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S85 described later.

On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that either the "bell spilled eye" or the "RT1 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the currently on RT game state flag and RT1 Turn on the game state. That is, when "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the RT2 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, or the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 Shifts the game state to the RT1 game state in which the bonus is not won. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 in the RT game number counter (S84). That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT termination means, and when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (high RT state), the "bell spilled eye" or "RT1" at the time of incorrect answering of the push order When the "transition lip" is displayed, the RT4 gaming state is terminated and the RT1 gaming state (low RT state) is entered.

When NO in S81 and S82, or following S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state in which the bonus is not won (S85). In S85, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 is not in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 93 moves to the process of S91 described later.

On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT0 gaming state is in the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "RT4 transition lip" is displayed (S86). In S86, when the main CPU 93 determines that the "RT4 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT4 game state flag. That is, when the "RT4 transition lip" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the RT start means, and when the "RT4 transition lip" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (high RT state). ..

On the other hand, in S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that the "RT4 transition lip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 93 determines that the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the RT3 game state flag. That is, when the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 93 shifts the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 in the RT game number counter (S90).

When NO in S85 and S88, or following S87 and S90, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (S91). ). In S91, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 is neither the RT1 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state nor the RT3 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and mainly performs the process. Move to S2 of the flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines to be either the RT1 game state in the bonus non-winning state or the RT3 game state in the bonus non-winning state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT game number counter (YES). 1 subtraction) (S92). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT game number counter is 0 (S93). When the main CPU 93 determines in S93 that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the currently on RT game state flag (S94). By turning off the currently on RT game state flag by this process, the game state shifts to the RT0 game state in which the bonus is not won. When this process is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 122).

<Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93. This process is performed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S102). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S103). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting a predetermined timer value for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission process (S104). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 constitutes a command transmission means, and transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area in each process to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. It drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the winning line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 28 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S107). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub-control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 128 to 154.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 102 when the power is turned on.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 102 checks for errors in the sub RAM 103 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, a sound control task, and a mother task, which is a task group for VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interruption synchronization. Further, in this initialization process, the effect ball is initialized or backed up according to the normal game state and the high-probability game state stored in the sub RAM 103, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 129 (S311). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive the timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, the lamp control task of various lamps. It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 131 (S312). In the sound control task, the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the accessory control task shown in FIG. 132 (S313). In the accessory control task, the drive state of the rotating accessory 200 is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 133 (S313), and terminates the power-on process. The mother task is a task group for VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and is a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when one frame of video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Initialization or backup processing of production balls during normal game state and high probability game state>
Here, the initialization or backup process of the effect ball during the normal game state and the high-probability game state, which is performed in the initialization process of S310, will be described.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-RAM 103 is composed of a DRAM as a work area and an SRAM for backup. The effect ball is basically stored in the DRAM, but is also stored in the SRAM for backup.

Here, in a gaming machine such as pachislot 1, the power may be temporarily cut off during the business of the game store, or the power may be turned off when the business of the game store is closed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, in the power-on process performed when the temporarily disconnected power is turned on, in the initialization process of S310, the effect ball stored in the SRAM is copied to the DRAM to back up the effect ball. To control the game situation so that it does not change before and after the power is turned off. On the other hand, in the power-on process performed when the power is turned on over business days, in the initialization process of S310, the newly drawn production balls are stored in the DRAM without restoring the backup data.

Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine detects that the power is turned on to the power supply device 44 by the power-on detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub-control board 42, and turns on the power. The date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) of detection is acquired from the RTC (real-time clock: not shown) arranged in the sub-control circuit 101. Then, the sub-control circuit 101 restores or initializes the backup data of the effect ball based on the date and time when the power-on is detected. That is, in the present embodiment, the power-on detection circuit arranged on the sub-control board 42 constitutes the power-on detection means.

Further, the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1 detects that the power supply has been cut off in the power supply device 44 by a power supply disconnection detection circuit (not shown) arranged on the sub-control board 42. The date and time are acquired from the RTC arranged in the sub-RAM 103 (SRAM) and stored in the sub-RAM 103 (SRAM) (power disconnection processing). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 acquires the date and time from the RTC when the power is turned on, and compares the acquired date and time with the date and time when the power stored in the sub RAM 103 (SRAM) is detected to be disconnected. To obtain the power interruption period indicating the time when the power was turned off. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply disconnection detection circuit arranged on the sub-control board 42 constitutes the power supply disconnection detection means, and the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the acquisition means for acquiring the power interruption period. In the game in which the effect ball is set in the apocalypse as described above, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "bell winning" or higher) is displayed, the probability according to the type of the set effect ball is displayed. In this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a privilege giving means in order to perform the transition lottery of CZ and ART and various additional lottery during ART (see FIG. 102 described above).

Here, if the power is turned off at the end of business and the power is turned on at the start of business, this power failure period will be several hours or more. On the other hand, when the power is temporarily cut off, this power failure period is only a few minutes at the longest. Therefore, when the power interruption period is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), the sub-control circuit 101 discards the effect balls stored in the sub-RAM 103 (SRAM) for backup, and newly 6 Re-lottery of individual production balls (production ball lottery when the apocalypse is activated, production ball lottery during CZ, production ball lottery during enemy determination ART, production ball lottery during battle ART) is performed, and it is sent to the sub RAM103 (DRAM). Remember. On the contrary, when the power interruption period is less than a predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 copies (restores the backup data) the six effect balls stored in the SRAM for backup to the DRAM. Then, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 before the power is turned off is maintained even after the power is turned on.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the backup data of the effect ball can be restored or initialized only from the time when the power-on is detected, not from the power interruption period. Since the business hours of a game store are often set in advance, the time when a game machine such as a pachislot machine 1 is turned on at the game store is also generally fixed. Therefore, when the time when the power-on is detected is a predetermined time (for example, the time between 7:00 am and 9:00 am), the sub-control circuit 101 is powered on when the business starts. Judging that, the production ball is initialized. On the contrary, when the time when the power-on is detected is other than the predetermined time, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the power is temporarily turned off and restores the backup data of the effect ball.

Further, in recent game machines such as pachislot 1, a game machine having an RTC function that performs a predetermined operation according to a time is also known. In the case of such a game machine, the backup data of the effect ball can be restored or initialized based on the current time, not limited to the timing when the power is turned on. Specifically, when the current time is the time immediately before the opening of the amusement store (for example, 9:50 am), the production ball is initialized. On the contrary, when the current time is other than the time immediately before the opening of the amusement store, the backup data of the production ball is restored when the power is turned on.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in S311 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 128.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the timer interrupt initialization process (S320). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization process of the lamp-related data (S321).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt wait (S322). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 102 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization can be mentioned. In addition, a task group for power interrupt synchronization (not shown), a task group for door monitoring unit communication synchronization (not shown), and the like can be mentioned.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the lamp data analysis process (S323) and performs the lamp execution process (S324). For example, the sub CPU 102 controls the light emission of the LED 403 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data, so that the display device 10 displays the image corresponding to the latent image 402. Further, for example, the sub CPU 102 controls the LED provided on the rotating accessory 200 according to the registered effect data to notify the result of the promotion lottery of the effect ball that is being hidden.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a call for a non-effect image that has nothing to do with the effect, such as a menu screen or an error screen (S325). Here, if it is determined that the non-directed image is not called (NO), the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a call for the non-directed image (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the panel is being displayed (S326). The term "panel display" means that the panel device 400 is in the process of emitting light from the LED 403 and displaying an image corresponding to the latent image 402. Here, if it is determined that the panel is not being displayed (NO), the process proceeds to S322.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the panel display is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently turns off the panel display LED, that is, the LED 403 of the panel device 400, and interrupts the panel display (S327). The process proceeds to S322. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 controls the light emission of the LEDs provided in the LED 403, the LED group 25, and the rotating accessory 200 of the panel device 400 according to the registered effect data. Configure.

Here, since the non-effect image such as the menu screen and the error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 provided behind the panel device 400, if the non-effect image is displayed during the panel display, the non-effect image may be displayed. Visibility is reduced. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when there is a request to call the non-effect image during the panel display, the LED 403 of the panel device 400 is turned off to prevent the visibility of the non-effect image from being lowered. Hereinafter, specific control when a non-effect image is called during panel display will be described.

<How to display non-directed images during panel display>
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an outline of a display method of a non-effect image during panel display.

In FIG. 130, the time t1 is the timing at which the effect data for panel display is read out. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 makes an output request for causing the panel control board 79 to emit light from the LED 403 based on the effect data. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the LED 403 is turned on from the time t1.

Further, the time t2 is the timing at which the call request for the non-effect image is detected. It should be noted that the detection of the call request for the non-effect image can be performed by any method. For example, a call request for an error screen indicating that the front door 2b is open can be detected by receiving a signal for displaying an error from the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74. Further, in the call request of the menu screen, the operation status of various operation buttons (selection button 18, enter button 19, etc.) provided on the pedestal portion 12 is monitored, and a predetermined operation (menu activation) is performed. Can be detected by detecting.

When the call request for the non-effect image is detected at time t2, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect data for displaying the non-effect image and requests an output for displaying the non-effect image on the liquid crystal relay board 77. Do. The liquid crystal relay board 77 displays a non-effect image on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to this output request. On the other hand, when the panel control board 79 detects the call request for the non-effect image, the LED 403 is turned off by giving priority to the call request for the non-effect image over the output request for the LED 403 received from time t1. At this time, as shown in FIG. 130A, the sub CPU 102 continues to execute the effect data for panel display. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally, and the light emission of the LED 403 is stopped by suppressing the output port.

As a result, as shown at time t2 in FIG. 130 (b), a non-effect image such as a menu screen is displayed on the display device 10. At this time, since the LED 403 is turned off, the display by the panel device 400 does not cover the non-effect image, and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

Further, the time t3 is the timing at which the end request of the non-effect image is detected. It should be noted that the detection of the end request of the non-effect image can be performed by any method. For example, the end request of the error screen indicating that the front door 2b is open can be detected by receiving a signal from the door open / close monitoring unit 74 for 24 hours that the door is closed. Further, as for the end request of the menu screen, the operation status of various operation buttons (selection button 18, enter button 19, etc.) provided on the pedestal portion 12 is monitored, and a predetermined operation (menu end) is performed. Can be detected by detecting.

When the end request of the non-effect image is detected at time t3, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for displaying the non-effect image. As a result, the non-effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 disappears. On the other hand, the panel control board 79, which has stopped the light emission of the LED 403 from the time t2, restarts the light emission of the LED 403 in response to the output request of the LED 403 received from the time t1. As a result, as shown at time t3 in FIG. 130 (b), the display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the panel device 400.

Further, the time t4 is the timing at which the execution of the effect for panel display is completed. At this timing, the sub CPU 102 ends the execution of the effect data for panel display, and ends the output request for causing the panel control board 79 to emit light of the LED 403. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the LED 403 is turned off, and as shown at time t4 in FIG. 130 (b), the display of the image corresponding to the panel device 400 in the display device 10 is completed. ..

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the non-effect image is called during the panel display effect, the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed to prevent the non-effect image from being covered by the panel display effect. Since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and no error processing or other processing is added to the production data execution processing itself, the pachislot machine 1 can simplify the processing when calling the non-effect image and has a bug. Can be reduced.

The conditions for restarting the lighting of the LED 403 after turning off the LED 403 due to the detection of the request to call the non-effect image are optional. That is, in the above description, the lighting of the LED 403 is restarted on condition that the end request of the non-effect image is detected. For example, the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the call request of the non-effect image was detected. The lighting of the LED 403 may be restarted at. As a result, the effect of the panel device 400 can be quickly resumed.

Further, when a call request for the non-effect image is detected, all of the LED 403 may be turned off, or only a part of the LED 403 may be turned off. Since the non-effect image such as the menu screen is displayed at a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 11, the visibility of the non-effect image is visible even if the panel effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the non-effect image. Does not spoil. As described above, since the LED 403 is an LED array in which a large number of LEDs are provided in a linear shape, the non-effect image is avoided by controlling the LED that is turned on / off according to the position where the non-effect image is displayed. A display for panel production can be performed. For example, when the non-effect image is displayed in the area on the rectangle substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, the non-effect image is displayed by turning off the LED in the center of the LED array and turning on the LEDs at both ends. It is possible to avoid the display for panel production.

Therefore, when there is a call request for the non-effect image, the sub CPU 102 specifies an area for turning off the LED 403 according to the type of the non-effect image for which the call request is made. Then, in the area specified by the sub CPU 102, the panel control board 79 prioritizes the call request of the non-effect image over the output request of the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display, turns off the LED 403, and turns off the LED 403 other than this area. In the area of, the LED 403 may be output in response to the output request of the LED 403 based on the effect data for panel display.

As a result, the non-effect image can be displayed while continuing the panel display effect by the panel device 400. In this case, by specifying the area where the LED 403 is turned off according to the type of the non-effect image, the panel display effect can be continued in a wider area, which is preferable.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in S312 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 128.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 23L and 23R (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound data analysis process (S331), performs the sound effect execution process (S332), and executes the process of S331. In the sound effect execution process of S332, various sounds according to the game are output, and an example thereof is shown below.

<Sound production execution processing when ART continues>
In pachislot 1, since the continuation of ART is controlled based on the victory or defeat during the battle ART, it is basically unknown whether or not the ART will continue until the battle ART ends (until the victory or defeat is decided). However, if there are multiple sets of ART (see Fig. 71, etc.), ART will continue even if the battle ART is defeated, and if bosses 7 and 8 are decided as opponents of the battle ART. However, since ART will continue, the continuation of ART may be confirmed before the battle ART ends.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the continuation of the ART is confirmed, the player may be notified in advance that the currently being executed ART will be continued by performing a predetermined sound effect execution process. Specifically, the pachislot 1 momentarily outputs the first sound that is continuously output during ART, the second sound that is continuously output during ART, and the second sound that is continuously output during ART as sounds during ART. It has a third sound to be played. The first sound is a dedicated song in ART that is output regardless of whether ART continues or not, and the second sound is another dedicated song in ART that is output only when ART continues. The third sound is a sound effect (siren) that is output only when ART continues.

As a method of notifying the player that ART will continue by the sound production execution process, for example, changing the song being ART from the first sound to the second sound in the middle of ART, or from the start of ART Various modes are conceivable, such as setting the song in ART as the second sound, and outputting the third sound at the start or in the middle of ART. In this case, when changing from the first sound to the second sound, the player may not be able to grasp that the song has changed depending on the connection of the songs, and the second sound is output from the start of ART. Therefore, an unfamiliar player may not be able to grasp whether the song is output when the continuation of ART is confirmed.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a sound effect such as the third sound is output before the second sound is output, so that the player can easily recognize that the ART continues.

<Character control task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a bonus control task activated in S313 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 128.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of accessory-related data related to the driving state of the rotating accessory 200 (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the analysis process of the accessory data (S341), performs the accessory effect execution process (S342), and executes the process of S341. In the accessory effect execution process of S342, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes according to the game, and an example thereof is shown below.

<Control of characters during promotion lottery>
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the cover member 198 of the rotating accessory 200 is opened to make the eyeball main body 203 visible to the player when the promotion lottery of the effect ball being hidden is performed. Specifically, when the lottery using the accessory movable lottery table shown in FIG. 85 is won, the sub CPU 102 sets the accessory data for opening the cover member 198. By controlling the rotating accessory 200 by the sub CPU 102 based on the accessory data, the eyeball main body 203 can be visually recognized by the player when the promotion ball is promoted and drawn.

<Control of characters during ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes during ART, and the rotating accessory 200 is used to express that the current gaming state is a special gaming state. For example, the cover member 198 of the rotating accessory 200 is opened and closed to drive the rotating accessory 200 so that the eyeball accessory blinks, and the cover of the rotating accessory 200 is linked to the start operation of the start lever 16. By making the member 198 half-open and leaving the eyeball member 205 half exposed, or by moving the eyeball member 205 to the left or right while the cover member 198 is open, the eyeball accessory can look around. Drives the rotating accessory 200. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 moves to a predetermined position during the ART, and a unique effect is performed to excite the game during the ART.

Here, depending on the player, the game may be interrupted in order to temporarily leave the seat during ART or to operate a mobile terminal or the like (smartphone or mobile phone) after operating the start lever 16. Even in the situation where the player does not exist or the game is interrupted even if the player exists, the rotating accessory 200 is continuously driven and the cover member 198 is maintained in the semi-open state. Therefore, the motor 214 (see FIG. 7) for driving the rotating accessory 200 and the motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 are consumed, which leads to a failure. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player leaves the seat or interrupts the game during ART, the driving of the motor related to the rotating accessory 200 is stopped, and the predetermined position (for example, the cover member 198 is moved). (Position to be in a semi-open state) By returning the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 to the initial position (for example, the position where the cover member 198 covers the eyeball member 205 (so-called state in which the eyes are closed)), the rotating accessory 200 The wear of the motor according to 200 is reduced. When the cover member 198 is in the half-open state, the motor (not shown) for opening and closing the cover member 198 needs to continue to excite the motor in order to keep the cover member 198 in the half-open state. The motor (not shown) wears out.

The method of detecting the player's departure from the seat or the interruption of the game is arbitrary, but in the pachislot machine 1, for example, during ART (more specifically, when driving the rotating cover 200 during ART, or , When the cover member 198 is in the semi-open state), a non-operation time indicating a period during which the player's operation is not accepted is measured, and when this non-operation time exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), The player may leave the seat or interrupt the game. That is, when the player is playing a game, some operations such as operations associated with the game (for example, start operation and stop operation) and menu screen operations are performed, so that the player's operation is not performed for a predetermined time. In addition, it is determined that the player has left the seat or interrupted the game.

Then, the sub CPU 102 moves the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 from the initial position to the predetermined position until the non-operation time reaches the predetermined time during the ART, thereby performing a unique effect during the ART and performing the ART. When the non-operation time reaches a predetermined time, the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to the initial position to reduce unnecessary wear. After that, when some operation is performed by the player, the non-operation time is cleared, so that the sub CPU 102 moves the movable part of the rotating accessory 200 from the initial position to a predetermined position to produce a unique effect during ART. Do. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a time-keeping means, and when the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 is at a predetermined position, the sub-control circuit 101 measures the non-operation time during which the game operation is not performed.

From the player's point of view, when he / she returns from his / her seat or resumes the game, the production of the rotating accessory 200 has ended, so there is a possibility that he / she may have the impression that the ART has ended. is there. Therefore, when the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 is returned to the initial position, the sub CPU 102 continues to notify that ART is in progress by emitting light from the LED, displaying the image of the liquid crystal display device 11, or sounding the speakers 23L and 23R. It may be that. Compared to a member that is physically consumed, such as a movable part of the rotating accessory 200, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the pachi-slot machine 1 will break down even if it is continuously executed while the player is away from the seat. When the player does not perform any operation, the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is suppressed by displaying a demo screen, for example, and the output is output from the speakers 23L and 23R in order to suppress the volume leaking to the surroundings from the viewpoint of energy saving. It is common practice to suppress the sound produced. Therefore, as a method of continuously notifying that ART is in progress, it is more preferable to control the light emission of the LED rather than the image display of the liquid crystal display device 11 or the sound of the speakers 23L and 23R.

<Mother task>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a mother task started in S314 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 128.

In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the main task started in S350 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes the VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360) and executes the VSYNC interrupt wait (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the drawing process (S362) and executes the process of S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in S351 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

First, the sub CPU 102 initializes the communication message queue (S370) and checks the received command (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S372). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S371.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 checks the order of the command received this time and the command received last time (S373), and the command order is normal. Whether or not it is determined (S374). In a game machine such as pachislot 1, a medal is inserted, reel rotation starts (operation of start lever 16), reel stop accompanying first stop operation to third stop operation (operation of stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), reel. Since the game is performed in the order of determining the combination of the displayed symbols after the stop and giving profits according to the symbol combination, the order of the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is also determined. The processes of S373 and S374 are processes of determining whether commands have been received in a predetermined order. If the received command is a command that is not related to the progress of the game, the sub CPU 102 does not determine the order of the commands.

If it is determined in the process of S374 that the order of the commands is abnormal (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets a sequence error (S375). Here, the sequence error is an error detected when the sub control circuit 101 receives various commands from the main control circuit 91 and receives the commands in an order that cannot occur in a normal game. For example, a sequence error corresponds to a case where the sub-control circuit 101 receives a start command without receiving a winning operation command after receiving a reel stop command. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the game order determination means, and determines whether or not the various commands received from the main control circuit 91 are in a predetermined order, so that the progress order of one game is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the command was performed in the order of. The predetermined order of the commands in the present embodiment is the order of the start command, the reel rotation start command, the reel stop command, the reel stop command, the reel stop command, and the winning operation command, and the bonus start command and the bonus end. Although the command is related to the progress of the game, it is excluded from the judgment of the order of the commands because it is not a command that always occurs in one game.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the end determination of CZ is performed according to the combination of the displayed symbols, and when the sub-control circuit 101 side cannot receive the winning operation command, the assumed game is played. A game different from the flow will be performed. For example, if a bell spill is displayed during CZ, the CZ is terminated on the sub-control circuit 101 side, but if the winning operation command cannot be received, it can be grasped that the bell spill is displayed. However, there is a risk that CZ will continue. In such a case, the start command for the next game will be received without receiving the winning operation command for this game. Therefore, by monitoring the presence or absence of a sequence error, the assumed game It is possible to prevent a game different from the flow of.

If it is determined in the process of S374 that the order of the commands is normal (YES), or following the process of S375, the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command, and the created game information is sent to the sub RAM 103. Store (S376). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 136 (S377), and executes the process of S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in S377 of the main board communication task shown in FIG. 135.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination process (S380) shown in FIG. 138, executes the lamp data determination process (S381), executes the sound data determination process (S382), and executes the accessory data determination process. Then (S383), each determined data is registered (S384), and the command analysis process is terminated.

In the effect content determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 is a predetermined game from a plurality of effects including a layer switching type effect and an effect switching type effect, which will be described later, in which the effect before switching can be switched from the effect before switching to the effect after switching according to the progress of the game. In, the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is selected. Further, in the sound data determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data for determining the content of the sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R according to the game, and in the accessory data determination process, the sub CPU 102 responds to the game. The accessory data for driving the rotating accessory 200 is determined.

<Anime task>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an animation task activated in S352 of the mother task shown in FIG. 133.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the change from the previous game information (S390). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the object control process (S391). Specifically, when the check result that the game information is changed is obtained in S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change of the game information.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a request for switching the effect (S392). Here, the effect switching request is predetermined for each effect being executed, for example, at the start rotation of each reel accompanying the start operation and the start operation, or at each of the first stop operation to the third stop operation. It is performed when the reel is stopped or when a predetermined operation button is operated. Such an effect switching request can be obtained based on a command (start command, reel rotation start command, reel stop command, winning operation command, etc.) received from the main control circuit 91. If it is determined in the process of S392 that the request for switching the effect has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the process of S396.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S392 that the effect switching request has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect after switching is a layer switching effect (YES). S393). If it is determined in this process that the effect after switching is the layer switching effect (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the effect after switching the image layer to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (layer switching effect). Switch to the designated layer (S394) and move to the process of S396. On the other hand, in S393, when it is determined that the effect after switching is not the layer switching effect (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes the effect in the image layer currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is switched to the effect after switching (S395), and the process proceeds to S396.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes the animation task management process (S396). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. When the sub CPU 102 executes the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S390.

<Specific processing when switching effects>
Here, a method of switching the effect when there is a request for switching the effect will be specifically described. In pachislot 1, the progress of the production is linked to the operation of the player by switching the production when the progress of the game such as a stop operation or the operation of a predetermined operation button (for example, a chance button) is triggered. .. In pachislot 1, the game is played by switching between a layer switching type effect that switches the effect according to the progress of the game by switching the layer in which the effect is being executed in advance and an effect that is executed in the same layer. It is classified and set as a production switching type production that switches the production according to the progress of.

Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when there is a request for switching the effect, the switching of the effect is controlled based on the relationship between the effect currently being executed and the effect after the change. Specifically, in the case of a layer switching type effect, the effect after switching is executed in a layer different from the layer on which the effect before switching is executed, and the layer displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is changed. By doing so, the production is switched. That is, in the work area of the drawing RAM 105, a first layer in which image data indicating an effect image corresponding to the effect before switching is set, and an image data indicating an effect image corresponding to the effect after switching are set. The effect is switched by storing the two layers and switching the layer to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the first layer to the second layer.

Further, in the case of the effect switching type effect, in the layer for executing the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect to be executed is changed from the effect before switching to the effect after switching, thereby performing the effect. Switch. That is, by changing the image data set in the layer stored in the work area of the drawing RAM 105 from the image data showing the effect image according to the effect before switching to the effect image according to the effect after switching, the effect is produced. To switch.

The layer switching type effect can reduce the occurrence of flicker due to the time lag that occurs when switching images before and after switching, but on the other hand, since multiple layers are used at the same time, the processing load of image processing Will increase, and the capacity of the drawing RAM 105 will be squeezed. On the contrary, since the effect switching type effect uses only one layer, the processing load can be suppressed, but flicker may occur due to the time lag that occurs when the image is switched before and after the switching.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the relationship between the effect before the switch and the effect after the switch is determined in advance according to the connection of the effects before and after the switch, the processing load of each effect, and the like. For example, a production that tends to cause flicker before and after switching and causes discomfort to the player is defined as a layer switching type production, and a production that does not bother flicker is defined as a production switching type production. deep. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to flicker when switching the effects, and it is possible to prevent processing omissions from occurring due to the switching of the effects.

It should be noted that the content predetermined for each effect (layer switching type effect or effect switching type effect) may be changed according to the continuation status of the game. For example, a player whose eyes are tired due to a long playing time becomes more discomforted by the flickering of the image. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 in which the player who has increased the playing time is playing, the production may be changed to the layer switching type production even if the production is predetermined as the effect switching type production.

The game time can be obtained by any method. For example, the operating time of the pachi-slot machine 1 may be acquired as the game time, or the time played by the player who has registered as a user in the pachi-slot machine 1 may be acquired as the game time.

<Switching the effect when operating the chance button>
In a gaming machine such as pachislot 1, an operation such as a chance button that is not related to the progress of the game may be urged to the player, and the effect may be switched when the operation is performed. Also in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player is prompted to operate the button. For example, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the chance button on the liquid crystal display device 11 while all the reels are rotating. By displaying it, the player is urged to perform a predetermined operation (pressing the chance button). The sub CPU 102 detects that this predetermined operation has been performed based on the command received from the main control circuit 91, and issues a reel stop command or the like from the main control circuit 91 before the predetermined operation is detected. By receiving, it is detected that the game has progressed without performing a predetermined operation.

Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the effect of switching is different depending on whether the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed or the game progresses without performing the predetermined operation. Specifically, when a predetermined operation urged by the player is performed, the first switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the pre-switching effect to the first. After switching, switch to directing. Further, if the game progresses without performing a predetermined operation, a second switching request is made, and the sub CPU 102 changes the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the pre-switching effect to the second post-switching effect. Switch to.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the effect of switching can be different depending on whether the predetermined operation urged by the player is performed or not, so that the playability is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. .. Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in S380 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 136.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S401). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the start command reception time process (S402) shown in FIG. 139, and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception processing, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S403). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel rotation start command reception processing (S404), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S405). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel stop command reception processing (S406), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the reel stop command reception processing, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S407). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the winning operation command receiving process (S408) shown in FIG. 149, and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S409). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus end command reception time process (S410) shown in FIG. 154, and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S411). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus start command reception processing (S412), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. Further, in the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command, the BB mode "0" is set as the initial value of the BB mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes other processing according to the received command (S413), and ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving start command>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a start command reception time process executed in S402 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is either a normal gaming state or a high-probability gaming state (S421). If it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal start CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 140 (S422). In this normal start CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed based on the internal winning combination and the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game.

Following the process of S422, the sub CPU 102 performs the apocalypse operation process shown in FIG. 141 (S423). In this apocalypse operation process, the sub CPU 102 controls to start or end the operation of the apocalypse.

Following the processing of S423, or when it is determined in S421 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S424). More specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state managed by the sub side is the normal gaming state and the RT gaming state managed by the main side is the RT4 gaming state. If it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 142 (S425). In this probability game state transition process, the sub CPU 102 draws avoidance points in order to shift the game state from the normal game state to the high probability game state.

Following the processing of S425, or when it is determined in S424 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state. (S426). If it is determined in S426 that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability medium-effect registration process shown in FIG. 143 (S427). In this high-probability medium effect registration process, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect (push order navigation) to prevent the main game state from shifting from the RT4 game state to the RT1 game state based on the avoidance point. ..

Following the processing of S427 or in S426, if it is determined that the gaming state is not a high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S428). If it is determined in S428 that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the CZ start ART lottery process shown in FIG. 144 (S429). In this CZ start ART lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) and the like.

Following the processing of S429 or in S428, if it is determined that the gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is in the bonus state (during BB) (S430). ). When it is determined in S430 that the gaming state is the bonus state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the ART lottery process in BB shown in FIG. 145 (S431). In this BB ART lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-mentioned transition lottery (F) and the like.

Following the processing of S431 or in S430, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is the ART gaming state (during ART). (S432). When it is determined in S432 that the gaming state is the ART gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the processing during ART shown in FIG. 146 (S433). In this ART processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect contents in the enemy determination ART and the battle ART.

In S432, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state (NO), or following the processing of S433, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a sequence error is set (S434). Here, the sequence error is set when the command order is not normal in the main board communication task. If it is determined in S434 that a sequence error is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a sequence error time process (S435), which will be described later, and ends the start command reception time process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S434 that the sequence error is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

<Specific example 1 of processing at the time of sequence error>
In the present embodiment, the CZ ends on the condition that the combination of symbols displayed when the wrong answer stop operation is performed in the push order in the game in which the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. To do. Since the CZ is managed by the sub control circuit 101 and the combination of the displayed symbols is managed by the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) transmits from the main control circuit 91. The end / continuation of the CZ will be controlled based on the winning operation command to be performed. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 terminates CZ when it receives a winning operation command indicating that the combination of displayed symbols is "bell spilled eyes" (see FIG. 153 described later).

Here, if the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, so that the game is different from the assumed game flow. It will be done. For example, if "bell spilled eyes" are displayed during CZ, CZ will be terminated on the sub control circuit 101 side, but if the winning operation command cannot be received, "bell spilled eyes" will be displayed. This cannot be grasped on the sub-control circuit 101 side, and there is a possibility that CZ will continue.

Here, the sequence error may occur due to a failure of the pachislot machine 1 regardless of the operation of the player, but the communication between the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 is temporarily cut off. It may be artificially generated by a fraudulent act such as a so-called command zero goto that causes a communication interruption state. If the end of CZ can be avoided by such fraudulent acts, the player who commits the fraudulent acts will gain an unfair profit.

Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, and terminates the CZ on the assumption that a sequence error occurs when the command order is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit due to cheating.

<Specific example 2 of processing at the time of sequence error>
In the present embodiment, the RT4 gaming state in the bonus non-winning state on the main side may be treated as the high-probability gaming state on the sub side. This high-probability gaming state ends at the timing when the sub side grasps that the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is displayed on the push order bell or push order lip (see FIG. 152 described later). Therefore, when the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the winning operation command, the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp the combination of the displayed symbols, and the game is played differently from the assumed game flow. It will be broken. For example, if "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed during the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is terminated on the sub-control circuit 101 side, but the winning operation command cannot be received. The sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp that "bell spilled eyes" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed, and there is a possibility that the high-probability gaming state will continue.

Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 checks the order of the commands received from the main control circuit 91, assumes that a sequence error occurs when the command order is abnormal, terminates the high-probability gaming state, and ends the normal gaming state. Migrate to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit due to cheating.

When a sequence error occurs, the history of the sequence error that has occurred may be accumulated. It is difficult to determine whether the sequence error that occurred was artificially caused by fraudulent activity or caused by a failure of pachislot machine 1 regardless of the player's operation, but the sequence By accumulating the error occurrence history, it is possible to grasp the tendency of cheating (goto). For example, a sequence error caused by cheating is likely to occur when the situation is advantageous to the player, and a naturally occurring sequence error regardless of the player occurs regardless of the situation. Therefore, when a sequence error occurs due to fraudulent activity, a history similar to the sequence error occurrence history is accumulated. Therefore, by making it possible to grasp the game state in which the sequence error has occurred and the type of command that could not be received on the sub-control circuit 101 side from the tendency of the occurrence history of the sequence error, a specific command can be received in a specific game state. By making it impossible, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the player unreasonably profits, which can be useful for the design of the game machine in the future.

<CZ / ART lottery processing at normal start>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a normal start CZ / ART lottery process executed in S422 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the start ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 based on the internal winning combination and the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game, and shifts to CZ / ART. (A) and (D) are performed (S441). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ has been won in this lottery (S442). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ in the game state of the next game (S443), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal start.

On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won in the lottery of S441 (S444). If the ART is not won (NO), the CZ / ART lottery process is ended at the normal start, while if the ART is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the ART gaming state as the gaming state. Set the enemy decision ART (S445). Since the ART gaming state is the RT4 gaming state on the main side, the RT4 transition lip is displayed and the main side must shift to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, "setting the enemy determination ART in the ART game state as the game state" does not mean that the game state of the next game becomes the enemy determination ART in the ART game state, but the RT4 game state on the main side. It means that the game state of the sub side becomes the enemy determination ART of the ART game state when shifting to. This point also applies to the following.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, draws the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S446). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal start.

<Apocalypse operation processing>
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an apocalypse operation process executed in S423 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S451). At this time, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S457.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S452). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table of FIG. 79 (C), the addition amount or the subtraction amount of the guaranteed number of times is drawn based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S452 (S453).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S454). When it is determined that the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the effect ball, sets it in the apocalypse (S455), and proceeds to the process of S462. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the apocalypse MAP, and draws the effect balls based on the MAP data defined in the apocalypse MAP (see FIGS. 80 to 83). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 upgrades the effect ball set in the apocalypse with a predetermined probability when the promotion lottery is possible (when the guaranteed number of movable characters is 1 or more).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the guaranteed number of times is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 updates the apocalypse flag to off, terminates the apocalypse operation (S456), and then proceeds to the process of S462.

Further, if it is determined in S451 that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs an apocalypse lottery based on the current winning mode (S457). Specifically, with reference to the apocalypse operation lottery table shown in FIGS. 79 (A) and 79 (B), the amount of the guaranteed number of additions is drawn based on the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the current guaranteed number of times based on the lottery result of S457 (S458).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the guaranteed number of times is 1 or more (S459). When it is determined that the number of legal phases is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the apocalypse flag and starts the operation of the apocalypse (S460). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 in the apocalypse (S461).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a winning mode transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (S462). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the winning mode of the transition destination with reference to the mode transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 74 to 78. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result as the winning mode of the next game (S463), and ends the apocalypse operation process.

<High probability game state transition process>
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a high-probability game state transition process executed in S425 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 draws avoidance points based on the internal winning combination (S465). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the addition amount of avoidance points with reference to the avoidance table lottery table shown in FIG. 89. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery of avoidance points has been won, that is, whether or not one or more avoidance points are added (S466). If the game is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets an avoidance point based on the lottery result (S467), and ends the high-probability game state transition process. On the other hand, if it is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability game state transition process.

<High probability medium production registration process>
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a high-probability medium-effect registration process executed in S427 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the push order bell or push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (S471). If it is determined that neither the push order bell nor the push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell or push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the avoidance point is 1 or more (S472). If it is determined that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation data that is the correct answer in the push order (S473). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the avoidance point (S474), and ends the high-probability medium effect registration process.

In this way, in the high-probability gaming state, when the push order bell or push order lip is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified based on the avoidance point. For the player, by playing the game according to the notification, the high-probability gaming state can be continued, so that the game can be played with peace of mind. Here, the high-probability gaming state is easier to win the transition lottery to ART than the normal gaming state, and when the correct push order is notified in the high-probability gaming state, the player is in a high-probability gaming state. The benefit of continuing has already been granted. Therefore, when the correct push order is notified in the high-probability game state, the lottery result of the transition lottery in the game may be discarded (invalid). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from becoming excessive.

<ART lottery processing at the start of CZ>
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a CZ start ART lottery process executed in S429 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 updates the number of continuous games in CZ (S481). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the first game of CZ (S482). If it is determined that it is the first game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently draws and sets CZ_MAP. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws and sets the CZ_MAP used in the CZ with reference to the CZ_MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 91 (S483).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point (S484). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines and sets the initial value of the invalid point with reference to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIG. 93 (A).

After determining that it is not the first game of CZ after S484 or in S482 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently draws the effect ball and sets it in the apocalypse (S485). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws and sets the effect balls based on the final effect balls currently being set with reference to the CZ medium effect ball lottery table shown in FIG. 94. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the development ball set in the apocalypse to the avoidance ball when the invalid point is 1 or more.

It is determined whether or not it is the 30th game of CZ (S486). When it is determined that it is the 30th game of CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the enemy determination ART in the ART game state as the game state (S487). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 draws and sets the ART state based on the CZ mode 2 with reference to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104 (S488). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the start of CZ.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the 30th game of CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 draws and adds invalid points based on the internal winning combination (S489). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the invalid point lottery table shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C), draws an additional amount of invalid points, and adds them to the currently held invalid points.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the development ball and the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination (S490). When any of the conditions is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the invalid point is 1 or more (S491). If it is determined that the invalid point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently subtracts 1 from the invalid point (S492) and sets the current CZ mode notification effect data (S493).

This effect data is, for example, an effect that notifies or suggests that the current CZ mode is 1, and that the CZ mode increases from 0 to 1 in a few more games (for example, a few times). It is the production data for. Specifically, there are production data in which the probability of being set differs depending on whether the CZ mode is 1 or 0, when the CZ mode is increased from 0 to 1 in a game within a predetermined number of times, and when the CZ mode is within a predetermined number of times. This is the effect data in which the probability of being set differs depending on whether the game does not go up from 0 to 1. As a result, the player can guess or grasp the current CZ mode when the invalid point is 1 or more.

On the other hand, in S491, when it is determined that the invalid point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table in CZ shown in FIG. 95, and shifts to ART based on the current CZ mode (C). ), And the lottery flag is set to on (S494). As described above, during CZ, if the development ball is set and the push order bell is hit, the transition lottery (C) is performed, but if the push order is correct when stopped, the lottery result of the transition lottery (C) becomes invalid. Will be done. The lottery flag is used to determine whether to invalidate or maintain the lottery result when stopped. When the process of S494 is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the start of CZ.

On the other hand, in S490, if any of the conditions is not satisfied (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an avoidance ball (NO). S495). When it is determined that the effect ball set in the apocalypse is the avoidance ball in this game (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for the current CZ mode notification (S496), and the CZ start ART lottery process. To finish. Further, in S495, even when it is determined (NO) that the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is not an avoidance ball, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process at the start of CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes an advantageous state lottery means, and shifts to ART based on CZ mode performed in the middle of CZ, or shifts to ART based on CZ mode 2 performed when the CZ is completed. Perform a lottery.

<ART lottery processing during BB>
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an ART lottery process in BB executed in S431 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the 7-matched lip has been determined as the internal winning combination (S501). When it is determined that the 7-matched lip has been determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table at the start during BB shown in FIG. 98, and performs a transition lottery (F) to ART in BB. .. Referring to FIG. 98, since the transition lottery (F) is always won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag to ON (S502). The ART winning flag is information indicating that the ART has been won in the middle of the bonus state, and is referred to at the end of the bonus.

Following S502 or determining in S501 that the 7-matched lip has not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the BB mode-up lottery table shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. Then, a mode-up lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (S503). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the BB mode based on the lottery result (S504), and ends the ART lottery process during BB.

<Processing during ART>
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an ART processing executed in S433 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 139.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state is in the enemy determination ART (S511). If it is determined that the enemy is not in the ART (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the battle ART processing shown in FIG. 148 (S517), and ends the ART processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the enemy determination ART is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the determined flag is on (S512). The determined flag is information for determining whether or not the enemy character of the opponent has been determined during the enemy determination ART. When it is determined that the determined flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the enemy determination ART in-process shown in FIG. 147 (S516), and ends the ART in-process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines the HP of the enemy character based on the internal winning combination by referring to the boss power lottery table during the enemy determination ART shown in FIG. 111. (S513). Then, the production data for introducing the enemy character is set (S514). The effect data for introducing the enemy character is, for example, effect data for displaying the boss status shown in FIG. 112. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the determined flag, sets the battle ART to the game state of the next game (S515), and ends the processing during ART.

<Processing during enemy decision ART>
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the enemy-determined ART-during process executed in S516 of the ART-during process shown in FIG. 146.

First, the sub CPU 102 draws a production ball and sets it in the apocalypse (S521). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the effect balls based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP and the ART state (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 also performs a stock lottery of ally balls, and if there is stock, rewrites the boss balls set in the apocalypse to ally balls (see FIG. 109). When the guaranteed number of games that guarantees the number of continuous games of the enemy determination ART is used as described above, the processing of S521 may not be performed between the games for the guaranteed number of games.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs the HP initial set processing of the ally character (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the HP of the ally character to the initial value when the HP of the ally character is less than the initial value (HP50).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a boss ball (S523). When it is determined that the boss ball is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the bell has been won (S524). At this time, if it is determined that the bell is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the enemy determination ART. On the other hand, if it is determined that the bell is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines the enemy character corresponding to the boss ball as the opponent (S525). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined flag to ON (S526), and ends the process during the enemy determination ART.

On the other hand, in S523, when it is determined that the boss ball is not set (that is, the ally ball is set) (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the enemy determination ART medium ally power addition lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the winning combination, a lottery is performed by adding the HP of the ally character (S527). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the ally character based on the lottery result (S528), and ends the process during the enemy determination ART.

<Processing during battle ART>
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the battle ART in-process executed in S517 of the ART in-process shown in FIG. 146.

First, the sub CPU 102 draws the production balls and sets them in the apocalypse (S531). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 draws the production balls based on the battle MAP data defined in the battle MAP (see FIGS. 113 to 119). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 also rewrites the enemy ball based on the awakening ball, and when the production ball set in the apocalypse in this game is the awakening ball and is more than the bell winning. , Rewrite the enemy ball set in the apocalypse to a ally ball.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a damage lottery based on the effect ball and the internal winning combination (S532). Specifically, when the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is an enemy ball, the sub CPU 102 performs a damage lottery by referring to the damage lottery table during the battle ART illustrated in FIG. 118. When the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game is a ally ball or an awakening ball, the damage lottery is performed with reference to the damage lottery table during the battle ART illustrated in FIG. 119.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the HP of the enemy character or the ally character based on the lottery result (S533). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP of the ally character is 0 or less (S534). When it is determined that the HP of the ally character is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART game state, sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S535), and ends the process during battle ART.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the HP of the ally character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (S536). If it is determined that the HP of the enemy character is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the battle ART. On the other hand, when it is determined that the HP of the enemy character is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 120 and 121, and determines the ART state based on the type of the enemy character and the number of continuations. Lottery and setting (S537). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the game state of the next game (S538), and ends the process during the battle ART.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a winning operation command reception processing executed in S408 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 138.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is either a normal gaming state or a high-probability gaming state (S541). When it is determined that the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the normal end CZ / ART lottery shown in FIG. 150 (S542). In this normal end CZ / ART lottery, the above-mentioned transition lottery (A) (D) at the start is performed based on the effect balls set in the apocalypse in this game.

Following the processing of S542, or when it is determined in S541 that the gaming state is neither the normal gaming state nor the high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S543). When it is determined that the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability transition determination process shown in FIG. 151 (S544). In this high-probability transition determination process, it is determined whether or not it is possible to shift from the RT4 gaming state in the normal gaming state to the high-probability transition state.

Following the processing of S544, or when it is determined in S543 that the gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state of the normal gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state. (S545). When it is determined that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the high-probability end determination process shown in FIG. 152 (S546). In this high-probability end determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Following the processing of S546 or in S545, if it is determined that the gaming state is not a high-probability gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state is CZ (S547). When it is determined that the gaming state is CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the CZ middle lottery result management process shown in FIG. 153 (S548). In this CZ middle lottery result management process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to maintain or invalidate the above-mentioned transition lottery (C) performed in the middle of the CZ.

When the processing of S548 is completed, or when it is determined that the S547 gaming state is not CZ (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the command at the time of winning operation.

<CZ / ART lottery processing at normal end>
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a normal end CZ / ART lottery process executed in S542 of the winning command reception process shown in FIG. 149.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the apocalypse flag is on (S551). If it is determined that the apocalypse flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the apocalypse flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the bell has been won or not (S552). If it is determined that the prize is not more than the bell prize (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of prizes is equal to or higher than the bell prize (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently refers to the reel stop ART lottery table shown in FIG. 87 and is based on the effect ball set in the apocalypse in this game. The lottery (A) and (D) for transition to CZ and ART are performed (S553).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ has been won in this lottery (S554). If the CZ has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ in the game state of the next game (S555), and ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the normal end.

On the other hand, if the CZ has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S556). If the ART is not won (NO), the CZ / ART lottery process is terminated at the normal end, while if the ART is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the ART gaming state as the gaming state. Set the enemy decision ART (S557). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, draws the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S558). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ / ART lottery process at the time of normal termination. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a lottery state start means, and when the CZ is won in the CZ based on the effect ball and the lottery (A) (D) for transition to ART, the game state of the next game is played. Is set to CZ to start CZ, which is an advantageous state lottery state.

<High probability transition judgment processing>
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a high-probability transition determination process executed in S544 of the command reception time process at the time of winning operation shown in FIG. 149.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S561). When it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the number of replays and the avoidance point (S562), and ends the high probability transition determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the bell spilled eye nor the RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the avoidance point is 1 or more (S563). If it is determined that the avoidance point is 1 or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the high-probability gaming state to the gaming state of the next game (S564). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the number of replays (S565), and ends the high-probability transition determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the avoidance point is not 1 or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to the replay other than the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S566). When it is determined (NO) that the combination of symbols related to the replay other than the RT1 transition lip is not displayed, the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability transition determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the combination of symbols related to the replay other than the RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of replays (S567), and ends the high probability transition determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the high-probability state transition means, and based on the fact that the avoidance point lottery is won in the above-mentioned high-probability game state transition process (see FIG. 142), the ART is entered. Transition The gaming state is shifted to a high-probability gaming state with a high probability of winning the lottery.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is maintained until the avoidance points are given, and the avoidance points are given. Transition to a high-probability gaming state. In a gaming machine such as the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which the situation of accidentally shifting to the RT4 gaming state is set to the chance section instead of the penalty section, it is necessary to adjust the balance so as not to be too advantageous to the player. In this regard, even if the main side shifts to the RT4 game state, the balance of profits of both the player and the game store can be adjusted by treating the game as a normal game state until the avoidance points are given. Of course, since it is sufficient to adjust the balance of profits of both sides within the entire gaming machine, it is possible to immediately shift from the normal gaming state to the high-probability gaming state at the stage when the main side shifts to the RT4 gaming state.

<High probability end judgment processing>
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a high probability end determination process executed in S546 of the command reception time process at the time of winning operation shown in FIG. 149.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (S571). If it is determined that neither the bell spilled eye nor the RT1 transition lip is displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the high probability end determination process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the bell spilled eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently clears the avoidance point (S572). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S573), and ends the high probability end determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a low-probability state transition means, and when a bell spill or an RT1 transition lip is displayed, the sub-control circuit 101 is in a normal gaming state in which the probability of winning the ART transition lottery is low. Shift the game state.

<CZ middle lottery result management process>
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a lottery result management process during CZ executed in S548 of the command reception time process at the time of winning operation shown in FIG. 149.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery flag is on (S581). If it is determined that the lottery flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery result management process during CZ.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the answer is correct in the pressing order (S582). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 responds to whether or not the stop operation is performed in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell in S490 of FIG. 144, in other words, "C_CD bell (see FIG. 30)". It is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed is displayed. When it is determined that the correct answer is given in the push order according to the push order bell (YES), the sub CPU 102 discards (invalidates) the lottery result (S583), and ends the CZ middle lottery result management process. As a result, CZ will continue. As described above, when the correct answer is given in the push order according to the push order bell, the lottery result may be maintained while continuing the CZ.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing order according to the pressing order bell is not correct (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART has been won (S584). If it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S587), and ends the lottery result management process during CZ.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART game state as the game state (S585). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, draws the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S586). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the lottery result management process during CZ. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the lottery state ending means, and based on the fact that it is determined that the push order bell is not correctly answered in the CZ, the game state of the next game is set. Set the normal game state, or set the ART game state as the next game state when the CZ completes (YES in S486 of FIG. 144) in the above-mentioned CZ start ART lottery process (see FIG. 144). ..

<Processing when receiving bonus end command>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a bonus end command executed in S410 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 138.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the BB end-time ART lottery table shown in FIG. 101, and performs a transition lottery (F) to ART based on the current BB mode (S591). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S592). If it is determined that the ART has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S593). If both S592 and S593 are NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game state to the game state of the next game (S596), and ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

On the other hand, if either S592 or S593 is YES, the sub CPU 102 sets the enemy determination ART in the ART game state as the game state (S594). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART state lottery table shown in FIG. 104, draws the ART state based on the game state at the time of winning the ART, and sets the lottery result (S595). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the bonus end command is received.

[Effect of pachislot 1]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Effect of JACIN carried over during bonus status>
In pachislot 1, if any of the JACIN-related roles ("F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", "F_JACIN3") is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (while carrying over). ), It becomes the RT4 game state of the bonus state. In this bonus RT4 game state, JAC1 replays such as "F_J1 upper 7 rips" to "F_J1 cross 7 rips", JAC2 replays such as "F_J2 chance rips 1" to "F_J2 cherry rips", and "F_FJ3" JAC3 replays such as "Chance Lip 1" to "F_J3 Cherry Lip" can be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIGS. 35 and 36).

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and controlled based on the game state and the internal winning combination. For example, if "F_JACIN1" is carried over as an internal winning combination and a JAC1 system replay is determined as an internal winning combination, two types of roles, "F_JACIN1" and a JAC1 system replay, are internally included in the game. Similarly, if "F_JACIN2" is carried over as an internal winning combination and a JAC1 system replay is determined as an internal winning combination, the game will say "F_JACIN2". Two types of roles, which are JAC1 replays, have been decided as internal winning roles.

Therefore, in pachislot 1, the stop control can be changed according to the type of the combination related to the JACIN carried over, and when the replay of the JAC1 system to the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination, the figure is shown in the figure. The stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in 57 is displayed. By using such control to make the privilege (ART) given to the player different, in Pachislot 1, it is possible to make different whether or not to give the privilege according to the type of carry-over role, so that the bonus The games in the state can be diversified, and the interest of the games in the bonus state can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the replay of the JAC1 system is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN1" is carried over as the internal winning combination, "7-matched lip" is displayed and "F_JACIN2" is displayed. If a JAC1 replay is determined as an internal winning combination while being carried over as an internal winning combination, a "normal lip" is displayed. By making the stop control different between the situation where the privilege is given and the situation where the privilege is not given in this way, it is possible to grasp whether or not the privilege is given from the combination of the displayed symbols. The person becomes strongly interested in the combination of the displayed symbols, and can enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 57, the pachislot machine 1 performs stop control capable of displaying "7-matched rip" only when it is a JAC1 system replay, and when it is a JAC2 system replay or a JAC3 system replay, it is " It is decided to perform stop control that cannot display "7-matched rip". In this regard, even in the case of a JAC2 system replay or a JAC3 system replay, the stop control may be performed so that "7-matched rip" can be displayed. Specifically, when the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN2" is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying "7-matched rip" is performed and "F_JACIN1" is performed. Alternatively, if the replay of the JAC2 system is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN3" is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that "7-matched lip" cannot be displayed. Similarly, when the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN3" is carried over as the internal winning combination, stop control capable of displaying "7-matched rip" is performed, and "F_JACIN1" or "F_JACIN1" or " If the replay of the JAC3 system is determined as the internal winning combination while "F_JACIN2" is carried over as the internal winning combination, the stop control in which the "7-matched lip" cannot be displayed is performed.

Then, when "7-matched lip" can be displayed, the transfer lottery (F) to the ART in the bonus state is performed by referring to the ART lottery table at the start of BB shown in FIG. Whether or not to give benefits can be different depending on the type, and the interest of the game in the bonus state can be enhanced.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the probability that the JAC1 system replay, the JAC2 system replay, and the JAC3 system replay are determined as the internal winning combination is different, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to make a difference in the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the bonus state.

In addition, the combination relationship between the carry-over combination and the winning combination that can display "7-matched lip" is arbitrary. For example, for JAC1 series replays, the only carry-over role that can display "7-matched rip" is "F_JACIN1", and for JAC2 series replay, the carry-over role that can display "7-matched rip" is There are two types, "F_JACIN1" and "F_JACIN2", and for JAC3 series replays, the carry-over roles that can display "7-matched rip" may be all of "F_JACIN1", "F_JACIN2", and "F_JACIN3". Of course, the combination is not limited to such a combination, and any combination may be used.

<Effect of high-probability gaming state>
In pachislot 1, an RT4 gaming state is provided as a high RT state in which the probability that the winning combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high, and when the transition to ART is won, information on an advantageous stop operation in this RT4 gaming state is notified. By doing so, the ART gaming state is realized (see FIG. 66). In pachislot 1, if the correct answer is given in the push order according to the push order lip during the RT0 game state, the pachislot 1 will shift to the RT4 game state. In Pachislot 1, if you accidentally shift to the RT4 game state due to a stop operation in a situation where you have not won the transition to ART, you will not be treated as a penalty and will shift to ART even in the RT4 game state that accidentally moved. A lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as a lottery, is performed. Since the RT4 game state is a high RT state, it is possible to play the game without consuming medals. Therefore, in the pachislot 1, the RT4 game state that has not won the ART is changed to the transition chance section to the ART. It is possible to enhance the interest in the high RT state where no privilege is given.

In addition, since the lottery for transitioning to ART is performed during the RT4 game state, the strategic nature for the stop operation during the normal game state is increased, and the interest during the normal game state can be enhanced. Specifically, in pachislot machines that accidentally shift to the RT4 gaming state due to a stop operation, the stop operation during the normal gaming state is simple (for example, the first stop operation so as not to receive a penalty). Must be done on the left reel, etc.). In this regard, since the pachislot machine 1 does not impose a penalty during the RT4 game state that has been accidentally transferred, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal game state, and only the playability during the normal game state is sufficient. The operability can be improved.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, as long as there is an avoidance point, information on an advantageous stop operation in the RT4 gaming state that has accidentally shifted (pushing order for avoiding the shift to the RT1 gaming state) is notified. As a result, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state, the player does not immediately shift to the normal game state, and for a predetermined period of time, the lottery for the transition to ART can be received with a high probability of winning the replay. ..

By setting the RT4 game state to a high-probability game state with a high probability of winning the transition lottery to ART, the RT4 game state that has been accidentally transferred can be set as a transition chance section to ART, and a privilege is given. It is possible to enhance the interest during the high RT state.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with an RT0 gaming state that can shift to the RT4 gaming state and an RT1 gaming state that cannot shift to the RT4 gaming state as the normal gaming state. In pachislot, it is necessary to adjust the balance between the profit of the player and the profit of the game store so as not to give an excessive profit to either the player or the game store. In this regard, comparing the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention in which the accidentally transferred RT4 gaming state is set as the transition chance section to ART and the other gaming machines in which the accidentally shifted RT4 gaming state is set as the penalty section, the comparison portion is concerned. The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention is more advantageous to the player than other gaming machines. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the balance of profits of both sides can be adjusted by providing the RT1 gaming state that cannot be transferred to the RT4 gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variables that adjust the profit balance between the two, and it is possible to provide a game machine rich in game playability.

<Effect of apocalypse during normal game state (high probability game state)>
The pachislot machine 1 is provided with a finish-running CZ as a chance zone for ART, and when the apocalypse is activated during the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, a lottery (A) (D) for shifting to the CZ when the reels are stopped is performed. In this transition lottery (A) (D), when the combination of the displayed symbols is "bell winning" or more, there is a probability according to the production balls (lottery balls 1 to 4, confirmed balls) set in the apocalypse. Will be done. By performing the transition lottery (A) and (D) in consideration of not only the content of the production (the production ball set in the apocalypse) but also the combination of the symbols displayed as the result of the game, the game state is transferred. It is possible to intervene the operation of the player with respect to the above, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In addition, since the lottery (A) (D) for shifting to CZ when the reels are stopped is performed when the combination of the displayed symbols is "bell winning" or more, the rare role is used as the internal winning role during the apocalypse operation. Even if it is not decided, the player can receive the transition lottery (A) (D). Therefore, as compared with the case where the game state transition lottery is performed based on the rare role, it is possible to give a lot of opportunities to have a sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the operation of the apocalypse ends when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0, but as shown in FIG. 79 (C), this guaranteed number of times is subtracted when the push order bell is won. Therefore, during the apocalypse operation, the player is notified. You will be given the opportunity to receive the transition lottery (A) (D) for the guaranteed number of times (the player can receive the transition lottery (A) (D) by answering correctly in the order of pressing at the opportunity). .. As a result, according to Pachislot 1, it is possible to avoid the situation where there is no chance of receiving the transition lottery (A) (D) during the apocalypse operation, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable. it can. In addition, referring to FIG. 79 (C), the guaranteed number of times is subtracted even when the internal winning combination is “off”. In this respect, the guaranteed number of times may not be subtracted in the case of "off", but the guaranteed number of times may be subtracted only in the case of the push order bell, whereby the above-mentioned effect becomes clearer.

<Effect of upgrade lottery of production balls that are hidden>
Here, the pachislot machine 1 manages the production balls that are set when the apocalypse is activated even when the apocalypse is not operating. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the promotion lottery of the effect balls (that is, the effect balls that are not displayed) stored in the sub RAM 103 is performed in the situation where the apocalypse is not activated. By performing this promotion lottery in combination with the driving of the rotating accessory 200, which is the feature of the centerpiece, the player plays the game hoping to be promoted to a more advantageous production ball during the period when the centerpiece is appearing. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, since the light emission of the rotating accessory 200 is controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery, the player expects that the effect ball has been promoted to a more advantageous effect ball 200. It can be inferred from the color of. As a result, if it can be presumed that it is advantageous, the player will have a strong interest in the later game, and the player can continue the game without getting bored.

<Management of production balls when the power is turned on>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten with a new effect ball based on the time when the power is turned on. From the time when the power is turned on, for example, it can be seen that it is the time before business at the amusement store, and by comparing it with the time when the power is turned off, it is before business on the next day. Therefore, if it can be determined from the time when the power is turned on, for example, that it is the start of business the next day, a new production ball different from the previous day can be set to change the set value from the production ball. It is possible to prevent the presence or absence from being grasped, and the fairness among the players is not impaired. On the other hand, if it can be determined from the time when the power is turned on that the power is only temporarily turned off, the pachislot 1 keeps the effect ball without rewriting, so that the game is played before and after the power is turned off. Maintain the condition of the aircraft. From the player's point of view, even if the power is temporarily turned off when a production ball that is advantageous to him / her is registered, the advantageous production ball will be maintained after the power is turned on again, which is dissatisfied. You can play the game without feeling it.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when rewriting the effect ball, the effect ball to be newly set is determined by lottery. As a method of making it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value has been changed, a method of rewriting the effect ball to a predetermined effect ball in the initial state when the power is turned on the next day is conceivable, but in such a method, a plurality of game machines If is installed, the variety of games will be diminished. Therefore, in pachislot 1, the variety of games is ensured by determining the effect balls to be newly set by lottery.

<Effect of CZ>
Pachislot 1 is equipped with a complete CZ as a chance zone for ART. In this CZ, if the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ performed at the time of winning the push order bell is maintained, it will end, but even if the transition lottery is performed, if the push order bell is stopped in the correct push order. , The transition lottery becomes invalid and CZ continues. In such a CZ, the player can receive a lottery to shift to ART not only when the push order bell is won but also when the CZ is completed. Therefore, even if the push order bell does not win at all during the CZ, the player Will be given a chance to move to ART, so it is possible to improve the interest in CZ.

In addition, in Pachislot 1, since it is decided to give more advantageous benefits (shift to advantageous ART) when the CZ is completed, the player can invalidate the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ that is performed when the push order bell is won. As a result, you will be interested in the combination of displayed symbols, and you can improve the interest in each game in CZ. In addition, for the player, he / she wants to complete the CZ, which is more advantageous, so that he / she can maintain the interest in the CZ until the end.

Further, in pachislot 1, invalid points are given during CZ, and as long as these invalid points remain, the transition lottery in the middle of CZ is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of receiving a more advantageous transition lottery at the time of completing the CZ, and it is possible to improve the interest in the CZ.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of CZ modes having different expectations for winning a transition lottery in the middle of CZ, and only upgrades the CZ mode according to the number of continuous games during CZ. As a result, in pachislot 1, the expectation of ART transition increases as the CZ continues, so the player becomes strongly interested in the combination of symbols displayed in the CZ, and the interest in the CZ. Can be improved.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when invalid points remain, an effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode is performed. As a result, the player can grasp or infer to what extent the CZ has become advantageous as a result of the continuation of the CZ, and can improve the interest in the CZ. The effect of suggesting or notifying the current CZ mode may be performed regardless of the invalid point. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 may perform a predetermined effect by comparing the number of games for shifting from the CZ mode 0 defined in CZ_MAP to the CA mode 1 with the number of continuous games for the CZ up to now.

In addition, in the case of winning in the transition lottery in the middle of CZ performed at the time of winning the push order bell in CZ, the lottery result may be maintained regardless of whether or not there is a correct answer in the push order. Then, in the case where the winning is maintained in the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ, if the correct answer is given in the push order, the CZ is continued while the ART rights are granted in the number corresponding to the lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of maintaining the winning in the transition lottery in the middle of CZ, if the answer is incorrect in the push order, the CZ ends, but the ART right is granted based on the lottery result.

By doing this, it becomes possible to expect to win the transition lottery to ART multiple times during CZ, and the dissatisfaction that makes you feel when you invalidate it even though you originally won it, It doesn't make the player feel. Further, even for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the CZ does not end when the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ is performed, then the transition lottery in the middle of the CZ and the transition lottery at the time of completing the CZ are further received. Since the opportunity will be obtained, the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation during the CZ, and the interest of the game during the CZ can be improved.

<Effect of BB mode in bonus state>
Pachislot 1 is equipped with a plurality of BB modes having different expectations for winning a lottery for transition to ART in the bonus state, and upgrades the BB mode based on the internal winning combination during the bonus state. In this way, in order to change the probability of winning the transition lottery to ART based on the internal winning combination in the bonus state, the player will have a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game in the bonus state. , You can enhance the interest during the bonus state.

In particular, in Pachislot 1, in the BB mode with low expectation of winning the transition lottery, the BB mode is upgraded with many winning roles, while in the BB mode with high expectation of winning the transition lottery, there are few types of winning roles. You can only upgrade the BB mode. As a result, as the BB mode is upgraded, the types of winning roles to be upgraded to the higher BB mode decrease, but as the BB mode is upgraded, the expectation of winning the transition lottery increases, so the game state gradually increases. It is possible to create a game form that is upgraded to. For the player, instead of being interested in the result of one game in the bonus state, he is interested in the series of game results in the bonus state, which enhances the interest in the bonus state. Can be done.

The BB mode may be upgraded only one step at a time, or a plurality of steps may be upgraded at a time. When controlled so that only one stage can be upgraded, the expectation during stay in the BB mode, which has a low expectation of winning the transition lottery, is lower than when multiple stages can be upgraded at once, and the BB is concerned. Since it becomes easier to upgrade from the mode, it becomes easier to create a game form in which the game state is gradually upgraded.

Further, in Pachislot 1, if a JAC2 system replay or a JAC3 system replay is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, it is treated as a "chanlip" according to the type of carryover role carried over as an internal winning combination. There are cases where it is treated as a replay (see FIG. 96). Then, when it is treated as "Chanlip", the BB mode is upgraded, and when it is treated as "Replay", the BB mode is not upgraded. As a result, the games in the bonus state can be diversified, and the interest in the bonus state can be enhanced.

<Control to start enemy decision ART after the bonus ends>
Further, in pachislot 1, if the combination related to JACIN is determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the player shifts to the high RT state (RT4 game state), and the combination of symbols according to the combination related to JACIN is displayed. And shift to a low RT state (RT2 game state). Since this RT state is maintained even after the bonus state ends, if the bonus state ends in the low RT state, the low RT state will occur even in the bonus non-winning state.

From the player's point of view, the stop operation may be performed while avoiding the display of the combination of symbols according to the combination related to JACIN, but the player who has little knowledge about the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have this. It is not always possible to perform such a stop operation, and the player may be disadvantaged. Here, control is often performed to prepare for ART without executing ART when the RT is in a low RT state, and if the state of preparation continues, the player tends to feel dissatisfied and the interest is reduced. Not only does it end up being less time efficient due to the period of preparation. The disadvantages that the player suffers are, for example, such a decrease in interest during preparation and a decrease in time efficiency.

In this regard, in Pachislot 1, when the bonus state ends in the state of winning ART, ART (more specifically, AT) is executed regardless of the type of RT game state, and the disadvantage to the player is reduced. To do. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has an enemy-decision ART and a battle ART as ART game states, and determines the continuation of the ART game state in the battle ART performed after the enemy-decision ART, and during the enemy-decision ART, allies. A game that increases the continuation expectation of the ART game state, such as an increase in the HP of the character, is performed. Therefore, even if ART is executed in the low RT state after the end of the bonus state, it is possible to execute the enemy decision ART, which is a chance section to increase the continuation expectation, so that the game is monotonous like in preparation. It is possible to reduce the decline in interest (disadvantage) without becoming. Further, since the preparation period is not provided in the first place, the time efficiency is not lowered, and the disadvantage suffered by the player can be reduced.

<Enemy decision ART effect>
In pachislot 1, a boss ball is set in the apocalypse during the enemy determination ART, and the enemy character to be played in the battle ART is determined according to the type of the boss ball set when the push order bell is won. Then, during the battle ART, the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character and the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character are changed according to the type of the enemy character. As a result, the result of the game during the enemy determination ART affects whether or not the ART game state continues, so that the player's interest in the continuation of the ART game state can be maintained over a plurality of games. it can.

Further, in Pachislot 1, since both the attack power and the defense power are set against the enemy character, both the amount of decrease in the HP of the ally character and the amount of decrease in the HP of the enemy character are individually set for each enemy character. Can be set. This makes it possible to employ various types of enemy characters, such as an enemy character with high offensive and defensive power, an enemy character with only one of them high, and an enemy character with low both, during the enemy determination ART. The game during the battle ART can be diversified according to the result of the game.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the speed is also set for the enemy character, and the frequency of the enemy character's attack during the battle ART is determined based on the speed set for the enemy character. As a result, the game during the battle ART can be further diversified according to the result of the game during the enemy determination ART.

Further, in pachislot 1, the HP of the ally character is added during the enemy determination ART. As a result, when a lot of additions are made, it becomes easier to avoid the HP of the ally character becoming 0 during the battle ART, and the expectation that the ART game state will continue will increase. Become. As a result, not only the game during the battle ART but also the game during the enemy determination ART affects the continuation of the ART game state, so that the player is interested in the continuation of the ART game state multiple times. Can be sustained over.

In Pachislot 1, when the HP of the ally character becomes less than the initial value during the enemy determination ART, the HP of the ally character is set to the initial value. As a result, since the HP of the ally character becomes at least the initial value or more in the subsequent battle ART, it is possible to prevent the HP of the ally character from immediately becoming 0 during the battle ART, and as a result, the continuous ART advantageous state is immediately achieved. It is possible to prevent it from ending.

Further, in pachislot 1, the HP of the ally character in the enemy determination ART is added according to the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, for example, when the rare role is determined as the internal winning role, the amount of addition can be increased, so that the rare role is not wasted and the interest during the enemy decision ART is improved. Can be done.

Also, in Pachislot 1, if a rare role is decided as an internal winning role during the enemy decision ART, a stock lottery of ally balls is performed, and if the stock lottery is won, the boss ball set in the apocalypse is used as a ally ball. rewrite. Since the enemy decision ART ends with the bell winning in the game in which the boss ball is set in the apocalypse area 113A, by rewriting the boss ball to the ally ball, not only can the enemy decision ART be expected to continue, but also Since the HP of the ally character can be expected to increase triggered by the ally ball, as a result, the degree of expectation for the continuation of the battle ART also increases. In this case, it is preferable to remove the boss balls 7 and 8 whose continuation of the battle ART is confirmed from the boss balls to be rewritten because the battle ART can be continued more easily.

Further, in pachislot 1, every time the effect ball to be set in the apocalypse is determined during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP (lottery information) that defines the boss MAP data for determining the effect ball is updated. In pachislot 1, this boss MAP has a ceiling function, and when the boss MAP on the ceiling is reached, the HP of the boss balls 7, 8 or the ally character whose continuation of the battle ART is confirmed is increased. Only ally balls are decided as production balls to be set in the apocalypse. From the player's point of view, if the enemy decision ART continues for a long period of time, only the boss balls 7, 8 or ally balls will be set in the apocalypse, so we decided to play with interest in the current boss MAP as well. As a result, the interest of the game during the enemy decision ART is improved.

<Effect of Battle ART>
In pachislot 1, enemy balls and ally balls are set in the apocalypse during battle ART, and the HP of the enemy character or ally character is reduced depending on the type of effect ball set when the push order bell is won. Then, if the HP of the enemy character becomes 0 before the HP of the ally character becomes 0, the ART is continued, and if the HP of the ally character becomes 0 first, the ART is terminated. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player will actively participate in the game during the battle ART, and the motivation for the game can be improved. ..

In addition, the target for reducing HP according to the push order bell differs depending on the effect ball set in the apocalypse. Here, since the production balls up to a plurality of destination games are set in the apocalypse, the player can play the game after grasping the set production balls, which is an advantageous timing for the player side. You will want to win the push order bell. As a result, the production ball and the start operation of the player can be strongly linked, and the player can play the game with a sense of tension, so that the interest during the battle ART can be improved.

In addition, since the push order combination that reduces HP is the winning combination of the notification target during the battle ART, the determination of the push order bell as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the battle ART. It will be. For example, depending on the game machine, the winning combination that reduces the HP of the ally character may be a replay, and the winning combination that reduces the HP of the enemy character may be a push order bell. However, in such a game machine, the presence or absence of a winning role that affects profits is directly linked to the continuation of ART, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, the playability during battle ART is diversified by making the winning of the push order bell, which affects profits, advantageous / disadvantageous according to the set production balls, as in pachislot 1. It is possible to enhance the interest during battle ART.

In Pachislot 1, when a so-called rare role is won, the HP of the enemy character is reduced regardless of the set production ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful pulling of the rare role, and the player expects that the rare role will be decided as the internal winning role during the battle ART, which enhances the interest during the battle ART. Can be done.

Also, in pachislot 1, if four enemy balls are set in a row during battle ART, the ally ball is always set next. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous situation for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the battle ART with peace of mind.

<Sound when ART continuation is confirmed>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the continuation of the ART is confirmed, the player is notified that the ART will be continued by outputting a dedicated sound. At this time, since the player may not be able to grasp the change just by changing the song in ART, the pachislot 1 outputs a sound effect (siren) that is output only when ART is continued before changing the song. .. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the ART will continue in the pachislot machine 1.

<Control of characters during ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the rotating accessory 200 is driven in various modes during the ART to produce a unique effect during the ART and to liven up the game during the ART. In this case, when the player leaves the seat during ART, the pachi-slot machine stops driving the rotating accessory 200 and returns the movable portion of the rotating accessory 200 to the initial position (for example, closes the cover member 198). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating accessory 200 from being unnecessarily consumed while enlivening the game during ART by using the rotating accessory 200, and as a result, the life of the gaming machine can be extended.

<Switching of production>
In pachislot 1, the effects in pachislot 1 are classified into layer switching type effects and effect switching type effects, and the progress of the game such as stop operation and the operation of predetermined operation buttons (for example, chance buttons) are set. The production is switched with such an opportunity. The layer switching type production is suitable for suppressing the flicker of the image, and by setting the effect that causes flicker before and after the switching and makes the player uncomfortable as the layer switching type production. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. In addition, since the processing load of the effect switching type effect is small, it is possible to prevent the processing from being dropped according to the effect switching.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, an operation such as a chance button that is not related to the progress of the game is urged to the player, and the effect of switching is different depending on whether the urged predetermined operation is performed or not. As a result, the playability is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Even in this case, by setting a preferable switching method for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

<Panel control when calling non-directed images>
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a so-called illumination array (panel device 400) is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the display of the panel device 400 can be interlocked to produce a highly effective effect. At this time, if a non-effect image such as a menu screen or an error screen is called by the liquid crystal display device 11 during the effect display on the panel device 400, the effect display on the panel device 400 is covered with the non-effect image, and the non-effect image is visually recognized. The sex is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the non-effect image is called during the effect of the panel device 400, the final output of the LED 403 that causes the panel device 400 to emit light is suppressed, so that the non-effect image is produced by the panel device 400. Prevent the display from being covered. In this way, only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed, and processing such as error processing is not added to the production data execution processing itself, so that processing at the time of calling a non-effect image can be simplified and bugs can occur. Occurrence can be reduced.

Further, since only the final output of the LED 403 is suppressed and the light emission animation of the LED 403 continues internally, the production in the panel device 400 is restarted from the middle when the display of the non-effect image is completed. .. Even in this case, since the process of interrupting or resuming the effect of the panel device 400 is not added, the process can be simplified and the occurrence of bugs can be reduced.

<Processing when sequence error>
The sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1 checks whether the order of the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 is normal, and if the order of the commands is abnormal, performs a predetermined sequence error processing. When a part of the game state is managed on the sub control circuit 101 side, it is necessary for the sub control circuit 101 side to appropriately acquire various information according to the progress of the game, and when some information cannot be acquired. , The player may get an unfair profit.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a sequence error occurs, the player is prevented from gaining an unreasonable profit by forcibly ending the advantageous state for the player. Specifically, if the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp that the bell spill is displayed during the CZ, the player unreasonably obtains the benefit of continuing the CZ. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a sequence error occurs during the CZ, the CZ is forcibly terminated to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit due to cheating.

Further, in pachislot 1, if the sub-control circuit 101 cannot grasp that the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed during the high-probability gaming state, the player unreasonably benefits from the continuation of the high-probability gaming state. I will get it. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if a sequence error occurs during the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is forcibly terminated to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit due to fraudulent activity.

[Second Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the control when the player shifts to the bonus state during the enemy determination ART will be described. Specifically, the management of the effect ball used in the enemy decision ART after the bonus state shifted during the enemy decision ART is completed will be described.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten with a new effect ball. Here, the effect balls to be rewritten may be all of the six effect balls stored in the sub RAM 103, or may be a part of them. When rewriting only a part of the effect balls, the boss balls 1 to 8 and the ally balls may be prioritized, and the effect balls to be rewritten may be determined according to the priority. Further, the number of production balls to be rewritten may be determined by lottery. That is, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, a predetermined lottery may be performed to determine how many of the six effect balls to rewrite.

Further, since the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls are advantageous production balls for the player, these production balls may be maintained without being rewritten. If the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls are hidden effect balls (that is, the effect balls stored in the storage area "6" of the sub RAM 103), the player can grasp them. However, even if it is rewritten, the player does not feel dissatisfied. Therefore, the hidden boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls may be the targets to be rewritten with new production balls.

The new production ball can be determined by drawing the boss MAP and based on the boss MAP data defined in the boss MAP (see FIGS. 105 to 108). Here, as described above, the boss MAP is provided with a ceiling function, and when the boss MAPs "52" and "53" are updated, only the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls are determined as directing balls. Will be done. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP for determining a new production ball is updated to the advantageous boss MAP. May be good.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is updated so as to approach the ceiling. It may be that. Specifically, in the boss MAP that reaches the ceiling when it is updated to a predetermined value, a mode in which a specific value is added to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART can be considered. For example, if the boss MAP used during the enemy decision ART is the boss MAP "30" and the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is added to the boss MAP and the boss A new production ball may be determined based on the MAP "40".

In addition, as another specific example, instead of adding to the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is updated to a specific boss MAP. You may do it. For example, if the role related to the bonus is decided as the internal winning role during the enemy decision ART, the boss MAP "40" is set uniformly regardless of the boss MAP used during the enemy decision ART, and a new production ball is set. May be decided. Of course, without making a specific boss MAP uniform, for example, if the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the first range (for example, the boss MAP "0" to "10"), the first 1 When a specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP "20") is used and the boss MAP used during the enemy determination ART is in the second range (for example, boss MAP "11" to "20"), It may be a second specific boss MAP (for example, boss MAP "30").

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus state is entered during the enemy determination ART, the effect ball stored in the sub RAM 103 is rewritten with a new effect ball. That is, in the second embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the profit state rewriting means, and when the winning combination related to the bonus (BB) is determined as the internal winning combination during the enemy determination ART, it is stored in the sub RAM 103. Rewrite all or part of the 6 production balls.
Since the ease of continuation of the ART game state is managed based on the effect ball, the enemy decision ART after the end of the bonus progresses based on the new effect ball, and the control of the period of the ART game state is played. It can be rich in sex. In this case, by maintaining the effect balls that are advantageous to the player, such as the boss balls 7 and 8 and the ally balls, without rewriting, the player can play the subsequent game with expectation, and the game can be played. The interest is improved.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a method of determining a production ball during a battle ART will be described. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the production balls (friend balls and enemy balls) are determined according to the type of the enemy character of the opponent during the battle ART (see FIGS. 113 to 115). In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the effect ball is determined by taking into consideration the remaining HP of the ally character.

FIG. 156 is a battle MAP lottery table that is referred to when the opponent's enemy character is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less. FIG. 157 shows the opponent's enemy character is the boss 5. Yes, it is a battle MAP lottery table that is referred to when the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1 and the remaining HP of the ally character is 21 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 113 is referred to, and the ally character's When the remaining HP is 20 or less, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 156 is referred to. Similarly, when the opponent's enemy character is boss 5, and the remaining HP of the ally character is 11 or more, the battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is referred to, and the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less. In some cases, the Battle MAP lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is referenced. The battle MAP lottery table when the other boss is the enemy character of the opponent is omitted.

Comparing FIG. 113 and FIG. 156, it can be seen that even when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the probability that the battle MAP of the migration destination is drawn differs depending on the remaining HP of the ally character. .. More specifically, compared to the battle MAP lottery table referred to when the remaining HP of the ally character shown in FIG. 113 is large, the battle MAP lottery table referred to when the remaining HP of the ally character shown in FIG. 156 is small. Has a high probability that "6", "7", "13", "14", "20", "21", "27", and "28" will be determined as the battle MAP of the transition destination.

As described above, the battle MAPs "6", "7", "13", "14", "20", "21", "27", and "28" are battle MAPs in which ally balls or awakening balls are always drawn as directing balls. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the attack frequency of the ally character increases as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases. Comparing FIG. 115 and FIG. 157, even when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 5, the attack frequency of the ally character increases as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases.

On the other hand, when FIG. 156 and FIG. 157 are compared, the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the ally character and the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers the increase in the attack frequency of the ally character differ depending on the type of the opponent character.

For example, referring to the transition source battle MAP "1" in which the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always drawn is about 60% or more depending on the remaining HP of the ally character. It has risen to about 80%. On the other hand, referring to the transition source battle MAP "1" in which the opponent character is the boss 5, the battle MAP in which the ally ball or the awakening ball is always drawn is about 22% or more depending on the remaining HP of the ally character. It has risen to about 48%. Therefore, it can be seen that the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the ally character differs depending on the type of the opponent's enemy character.

Further, as shown in FIG. 156, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the ally character is 20 or less, and as shown in FIG. 157, When the enemy character of the opponent is boss 5, the battle MAP lottery table is changed when the remaining HP of the ally character is 10 or less. Therefore, it can be seen that the remaining HP of the ally character, which triggers an increase in the attack frequency of the ally character, differs depending on the type of the enemy character of the opponent. That is, in the third embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the probability changing means, and the HP of the ally character is less than the change threshold value (for example, when the enemy character of the opponent is the boss 1, the HP is "20" or less. When the HP is "10" or less in the case of boss 5, the MAP lottery is changed and the frequency of attacks by ally characters is changed.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, as the remaining HP of the ally character decreases, the attack frequency of the ally character can be increased, so that it is possible to produce a reversal from a pinch, and the game during the battle ART can be performed. It can be sweaty in your hands. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability of whether or not the ART game state continues, and the interest of the game in the ART game state is improved.

In addition, by making the rate of increase in the attack frequency of the ally character and the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers the increase in the attack frequency of the ally character different depending on the type of the enemy character, the game of whether or not the ART game state continues. The sex can be further diversified, and the interest of the game in the ART game state is improved.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the number of times the attack frequency of the ally character is increased is only once, in other words, the remaining HP of the ally character that triggers the increase in the attack frequency of the ally character is set for each enemy character. Only one is set, but it is not limited to this. Specifically, when the HP of the ally character is less than the first value, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased by one level, and when the HP of the ally character is less than the first value, the attack frequency of the ally character is increased to the second value or less. You may increase the attack frequency of your ally character multiple times, such as by increasing it one step further.

In this case, the number of times the attack frequency of the ally character is increased may be different depending on the type of the enemy character. By doing so, for example, as the HP of the ally character decreases, the attack frequency of the ally character gradually increases, or when the HP of the ally character becomes low, the attack frequency of the ally character rapidly increases. Characters can be created, and as a result, the playability of whether or not the ART game state continues can be further diversified, and the interest of the game in the ART game state is improved.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the effect control method at the end of the bonus state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the effect for the end of the bonus is set at the start of the game in which the bonus state may end, and the bonus ends when the bonus state actually ends as a result of the game. On the other hand, if the bonus state does not end, the effect for the end of the bonus is rewritten to the effect for the continuation of the bonus, and the effect for the continuation of the bonus is executed.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ART lottery process in BB executed by the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment instead of the ART lottery process in BB executed by the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 145). .. The ART lottery process in BB shown in FIG. 158 is performed when a start command is received during the bonus state (see S431 in FIG. 139).

Comparing the ART lottery process in BB of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 145 and the ART lottery process in BB of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 158, S601 to S604 of the ART lottery process in BB of the fourth embodiment are compared. Since the processing is the same as the processing of S501 to S504 of the ART lottery processing of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 158, following the process of S604, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is "9" or less (S605). When the value of the bonus end number counter is "9" or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently registers the bonus end time effect and ends the ART lottery process during BB. On the contrary, when the value of the bonus end number counter is not "9" or less (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART lottery process during BB. The effect at the end of the bonus is an effect performed at the end of this game. For example, a screen for notifying the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the result of the ART lottery performed during the bonus state is displayed. It is a production to display.

Here, in pachislot 1, since the maximum number of payouts per game in the bonus state is 10, if the value of the bonus end number counter is "9" or less, the bonus state may end. is there. The processes of S604 and S605 are processes for registering the effect for the end of the bonus at the start of the game in which the bonus state may end. The bonus end number counter may be managed independently on the sub side, or information managed on the main side (see FIG. 124) may be acquired via various commands.

Subsequently, FIG. 159 shows a flow chart of the winning operation command reception processing executed by the pachislot 1 of the fourth embodiment instead of the winning operation command reception processing executed by the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 149). It is a flowchart which shows. The processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command shown in FIG. 159 is performed when the command received from the main side is the winning operation command (see S408 in FIG. 138).

Comparing the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 149 with the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 159, S611 of the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the fourth embodiment. Since the processing of to S618 is the same as the processing of S541 to S548 of the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 159, following the process of S618, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the BB (S619). If it is in BB (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes the BB middle effect control process described later in S160 (S620), and ends the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command. On the other hand, if it is not in BB (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command.

Subsequently, FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control processing during BB executed by the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment. The BB effect control process shown in FIG. 160 is performed when a winning operation command is received during the bonus state (see S620 in FIG. 159).

As shown in FIG. 160, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect at the end of the bonus is registered (S631). If the effect at the end of the bonus is not registered (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect control process during BB.

On the other hand, when the bonus end effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S632). When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently executes the registered effect (bonus end effect) (S634), and performs the effect control process during BB. To finish.

On the other hand, if the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (NO), the sub CPU 102 rewrites the registered bonus end effect to the bonus continuation effect (S633), and then rewrites the bonus. The continuous effect is executed (S634), and the effect control process during BB is terminated.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, at the start of the game in which the bonus state may end, the effect for the end of the bonus is set once, and based on the result of the game, Change the effect to be executed at the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect at the end of the bonus state from being executed even though the bonus state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the bonus state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes the effect control means, sets the effect for the end of the bonus at the start of the game in which the bonus state may end, and the game result (end of the bonus). Based on the value of the number counter), it is controlled whether to execute the bonus end effect set at the start of the game or to rewrite the bonus continuation effect to execute the bonus continuation effect.

Further, even if the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state is diversified, it is preferable because the end time of the bonus state can be appropriately notified. That is, depending on the game machine, the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state may be fixed. In such a game machine, the timing at which the bonus state ends is also fixed, so that the effect at the end is not accidentally executed, but the game in the bonus state becomes monotonous.

In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state differs depending on the result of the game, so that the game during the bonus state is prevented from becoming monotonous and the bonus is provided. It is possible to appropriately notify the end of the state.

[Modification example]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this.

In the pachislot of the above embodiment, when the production ball is set in the apocalypse, it is set on the condition that the internal winning combination is "bell winning" or more, or the combination of displayed symbols is "bell winning" or more. It is decided to perform lottery etc. based on the production balls that are being played. In this regard, when the effect ball is set in the apocalypse, the lottery or the like based on the effect ball may be performed regardless of the combination of the internal winning combination and the displayed symbols. In such a pachislot machine, the game balance can be adjusted by adjusting the frequency of setting blanks in the apocalypse.

In the pachislot machine of the above embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 manages the transition control to the advantageous state (for example, “ART state”), manages the duration of the advantageous state, and notifies (navigates) the notification (navigation) performed during the advantageous state. Although management is performed, one or all of these controls may be performed in the main control circuit 91.

In addition, as the transition control to the advantageous state, for example, the control (transition lottery) relating to the transition to the advantageous state / not to shift can be mentioned. Further, for example, in the case of the pachi-slot machine 1 in which a plurality of states having different winning probabilities are provided in the lottery for transition to the advantageous state, control regarding the transition between the states can also be included in the transition control to the advantageous state.

Further, the management of the duration of the advantageous state is the control regarding the increase / decrease of the HP of the enemy character and the ally character in the case of the above embodiment, and in the case of other pachislot machines, for example, the number of initial games in the advantageous state. Decision, additional control of the number of AT games can be mentioned. Further, for example, in the case of pachislot 1 in which the advantageous state continues with a predetermined probability, a lottery as to whether or not to continue can be included in the management of the duration of the advantageous state.

The duration of the advantageous state depends on the specifications of the gaming machine, the number of unit games in the advantageous state, the number of times the player is notified of advantageous information during the advantageous state, and the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state. , An arbitrary period such as the number of sets when a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one set can be included.

At this time, as for the number of medals given during the advantageous state, a net increase number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game may be used. In addition, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may be calculated based on the medals actually increased during the advantageous state (calculation based on the actual value), and regardless of whether or not the number actually increased. , It may be calculated based on the number of medals that will increase when following the navigation (calculation based on the ideal value). Further, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, for some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as the internal winning combination, or for the winning combination in which the display / non-display of the symbol combination is switched according to the timing of the stop operation, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number of medals awarded during the advantageous state may not be increased or decreased.

Further, the management of the notification (navigation) performed in the advantageous state includes a control of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like.

Further, the mode of the stop operation for notifying the player may be the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed, and the combination of the symbols is displayed. It may be the timing of the stop operation (design to be aimed at) necessary for this purpose.

In addition, as an advantageous state, the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player without changing the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game (or changing within a range that does not affect the game playability). A so-called "AT" for notifying may be used, and a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is high is activated, and a stop operation advantageous to the player is performed. The so-called "ART" that notifies the aspect of the above may be used.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine of the above embodiment or various modifications, the effect is determined with a predetermined probability according to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91, that is, one or a plurality of producings for one internal winning combination. Is to be done. In this regard, a display (notification) uniquely corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 may be performed together with the effect. Specifically, the display having a one-to-one correspondence with the determined internal winning combination may be performed on the above-mentioned 7-segment display 28, a display unit (not shown) for displaying the internal winning combination, or the like. It is preferable that the display of the internal winning combination is performed under the control of the main control circuit 91. When the main control circuit 91 itself announces the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 91 in this way, it is possible to provide a game machine that guarantees fairness.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can use the number of AT games that continue AT ( We hope that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Further, in recent years, a high-probability replay state (RT) has a high probability that a replay (replay) that can be played without inserting medals is determined as an internal winning combination, triggered by a predetermined condition. A game machine that operates is also known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-204875) discloses a gaming machine that activates a high-probability re-gaming state when the bonus state ends.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine of the patent document, the high-probability re-gaming state is activated after the bonus ends, so that the game can be played without reducing the medals after the bonus ends, but the high-probability re-gaming state always occurs after the bonus ends. , There is a risk that the game during the bonus will become monotonous. Therefore, in a gaming machine that operates a high-probability re-gaming state after the end of the bonus, a mechanism is required in which the game during the bonus does not become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game in a special gaming state.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A symbol changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol, a normal state, and a special gaming state (for example, a bonus) that is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. An internal lottery table provided corresponding to a plurality of gaming states including a state), a switching means for switching the gaming state (for example, a main control circuit 91) triggered by a predetermined condition, and the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation, the internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is referred to, and the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations and the above-mentioned A stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A reel stop control means (for example, mainly) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. The internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the control circuit 91) and the symbol stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The internal lottery table provided with the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the above-mentioned is won or not has been won, and is provided in response to the special gaming state. When determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a plurality of carry-over combinations (for example, F_JACIN1 to) that can be carried over as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the prize has been won by the winning determination means during the special gaming state. When any of 3) is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination, and the first carry-over combination (for example, F_JACIN1) among the plurality of carry-over combination is carried over as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state. A predetermined combination (for example, F_J1) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the upper 7 rips to F_J1 cross 7 rips are determined as the internal winning combination, a privilege (for example, winning the transfer lottery of ART) is given, and a second carry-over combination (for example, F_JACIN2) different from the first carry-over combination is given. Is further provided with a privilege granting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that does not grant the privilege when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination when is carried over as the internal winning combination.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can carry over any one of a plurality of carry-over combinations as an internal winning combination during the special gaming state. Then, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the gaming machine according to the present invention grants a privilege if the first carry-over combination is carried over, and does not grant a privilege if the second carry-over combination is carried over. .. As a result, even if the player wins the predetermined role internally, it is possible to make a difference whether or not to give the privilege according to the type of the carry-over role, so that the game in the special game state can be diversified. , It is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game state.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

By the way, in a gaming machine having an ART function, even when the transition to an advantageous state is not determined, the player may operate the re-gaming state with a high probability by the stop operation of the player. In this regard, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-233721), when the transition to the advantageous state is not determined, the information advantageous to the player is not notified during the high-probability replay state, and the information is high. It is described that the control for falling from the stochastic replay state to the normal state is performed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, the control of falling from the high-probability re-gaming state to the normal state when the transition to the advantageous state is not determined is used as a so-called penalty, and the high-probability re-gaming state is accidentally caused by the player's stop operation. When the operation of is performed, it is common that the lottery for transition to an advantageous state is not performed.

However, even though the gaming state is a high-probability re-gaming state, if the transition to the advantageous state is not performed, the privilege is not given during the high-probability re-gaming state (for example, RT during ART non-winning). Middle) lacks in fun.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine for improving the interest of a game to which no privilege is given.

[Means to solve problems]

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state in which the probability that the replay related to the re-game is determined as the internal winning combination is low (for example, the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state) and the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels. A symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of displayed symbols, a start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, a main control circuit 91, a start switch 64), and Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel, and the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection, when the internal winning combination is determined, the first symbol combination (for example, RT4 transition lip) or the second symbol combination (for example, RT1 transition lip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the stop operation. The first push order combination (for example, push order lip) and the third symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) or the fourth symbol combination (for example) depending on the order of the stop operation when determined as the internal winning combination. , The combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is pushed) is stopped. The internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including the second pushing order combination (for example, the pushing order bell). A combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. It is displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. On the effective line provided in the symbol display means based on the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped by the reel stop control means. The determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the combination of the symbols stopped in the above, and the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination according to the first push order by the determination means during the normal state. When it is determined that the first symbol combination of the symbol combinations of is stopped, the game is changed from the normal state to the high RT state. The RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that shifts the state, and the third symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination according to the second push order combination by the determination means during the high RT state. When it is determined that the third symbol combination of the above has stopped, the gaming state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, and when it is determined that the fourth symbol combination has stopped, the high When the RT termination means for maintaining the RT state (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to ART) performed during the normal state or the high RT state are won, the effect state related to the game is achieved. The specific effect state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting to the specific effect state (for example, the ART gaming state) for notifying the information of the advantageous stop operation, and the above-mentioned state in which the predetermined lottery is not won. When the RT start means shifts the gaming state to the high RT state, information on the stop operation required to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination ( For example, the notification number determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining the number of notifications (for example, the guaranteed number of times) for notifying the push order bell of the correct answer) and the specific effect state transition means are the specific effect state. When the first push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal state, the information of the stop operation required to stop the first symbol combination is notified, and the high Information on an advantageous stop operation during the RT state is notified, and when the second push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the high RT state of non-winning in the predetermined lottery, the notification number determination means. It is characterized by including a notification means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a liquid crystal display device 11) that notifies information on a stop operation that is advantageous only for the number of notifications determined by the above.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state in which the probability that the replay related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low and a high RT state in which the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high. It is possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (so-called ART) for the player by notifying the information of the advantageous stop operation in the specific effect state inside. Here, since the transition to the specific effect state is performed by winning not only the predetermined lottery performed in the normal state but also the predetermined lottery performed in the high RT state, the predetermined lottery is won. Even if it shifts to the high RT state without it, it can be expected to shift to the specific production state after that. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, a high RT state that has not won a predetermined lottery can be set as a transition chance section to an advantageous gaming state (so-called ART), and a privilege is given. No (not winning a predetermined lottery) It is possible to enhance the interest during a high RT state.

In addition, since a predetermined lottery is performed during the high RT state, the strategicity for the stop operation in the normal state is increased, and the interest in the normal state can be enhanced. That is, in the game property that imposes a penalty in a high RT state where no privilege is given as in a conventional game machine, the stop operation in the normal state is simple (for example, the first stop operation is performed so as not to receive a penalty). You have to do it for the left reel, etc.). In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since a predetermined lottery is performed without imposing a penalty during the high RT state, the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state, and the player can freely perform the stop operation during the normal state. Not only playability but also operability can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third symbol combination corresponding to the second push order combination is stopped during the high RT state, the high RT state is terminated and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state. When shifting to the high RT state without winning the lottery, information on advantageous stop operations (for example, necessary to stop the fourth symbol combination when the second push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination). Information on stop operation) is notified a predetermined number of times. As a result, when the player accidentally shifts to the high RT state due to the player's stop operation, the high RT state does not immediately shift to the normal state, and a predetermined lottery is received with a high probability of winning the replay. be able to.

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

By the way, in a game machine equipped with an ART function, a chance zone with a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed to shift to the ART state with a high probability. .. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internal. A gaming machine that controls the transition to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a patented gaming machine, the player's interest in the chance zone will be focused on whether or not a particular symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery, so depending on the player, there is a possibility that the specific symbol combination will be displayed in the chance zone. May not be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not be able to obtain any chance even though he / she has moved to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period of time, which triggers a transition to an advantageous state advantageous for the player. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the start operation detection means, the first is according to the order of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination. A plurality of combinations including a push order combination (for example, a combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct) or a second symbol combination (for example, a bell spill) that can be stopped and displayed (for example, a push order bell). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among the reels, and a stop operation for stopping each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels are detected. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stopping operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means, the reel When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. In addition, a winning determination means (for example,) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. , Main control circuit 91) and a lottery state start means (for example, sub-control) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition. Circuit 101) and the first shift lottery (for example,) that determines with a predetermined probability that when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state, it is determined to shift to the advantageous state. , The transition lottery to ART performed in the middle of CZ), and in the advantageous state lottery state, a predetermined number of singles An advantageous state lottery means (for example, a lottery for shifting to ART performed when the CZ is completed) is performed by a second transition lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to ART performed when the CZ is completed) that determines with a specific probability that the game will shift to the advantageous state after the game (for example, 30 games) has elapsed. When the first symbol combination is displayed on the effective line in the unit game in which the sub-control circuit 101) and the first shift lottery are performed, the first shift is made regardless of the result of the shift lottery to the advantageous state. When the lottery is invalidated and the second symbol combination is displayed on the effective line in the unit game, the lottery result management means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that maintains the lottery result of the first transition lottery When the first transition lottery is performed in the advantageous state lottery state and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained by the lottery result management means, or when the predetermined number of unit games have elapsed. When it is determined by the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state and the first transition lottery or the second transition lottery, the game is played. It is determined that the advantageous state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the state to be performed to the advantageous state is provided, and the advantageous state transition means shifts to the advantageous state by the second transition lottery. And, it is characterized in that it shifts to the advantageous state (for example, the ART gaming state of the more advantageous ART state) which is more advantageous than the case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous state by the first shift lottery.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition lottery to the advantageous state advantageous for the player is performed, the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Perform a transition lottery. Then, this advantageous state lottery state ends when the first transition lottery is performed and the lottery result of the first transition lottery is maintained, or when a predetermined number of unit games have elapsed. In this way, the gaming machine that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination may not be able to receive the first transition lottery at all during the advantageous state lottery state depending on the player, but it relates to the present invention. In the game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games have elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state, the second transition lottery is performed. As a result, even if the push order combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state lottery state, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous state can always be received, so that the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be improved. ..

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but when the first symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation, the first transition lottery is performed. The result of the first transition lottery is maintained when the second symbol combination is displayed. According to such control, the player is also interested in the symbol combination displayed in the game in which the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and thus the interest in each game during the advantageous state lottery state. Can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state of shifting through the second transition lottery is a more advantageous state than the advantageous state of shifting through the first transition lottery, so that the player can use the second symbol. It is desired that a predetermined number of unit games elapse without the combination being displayed (the first transition lottery is maintained and the advantageous state lottery state ends), and the interest in the advantageous state lottery state can be maintained until the end. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, many measures have been taken to diversify the opportunity to shift to the advantageous state (ART). For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-126369), a specific role (7 in BB) is included in the bonus. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous state after the end of the bonus is disclosed when the internal winning is made.

[Outline of Invention]
[Issues that Ming is trying to solve]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the transition lottery to the advantageous state is performed based on the result of one internal lottery during a predetermined period (during the bonus), the game tends to be monotonous, and there is a sense of expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state. There was a problem that it was difficult to hold. In addition, since the winning probability is generally kept low for the specific role that triggers the transition to the advantageous state, it is not possible to expect to win during the predetermined period, and this is the trigger for the transition to the advantageous state. There is also a risk of spoiling the interest of the game for a predetermined period.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period of time, which triggers a transition to an advantageous state advantageous for the player. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. A combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. It is displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the reel stop control means stops on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination of the symbols, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and a predetermined condition (for example, BB) The advantageous state lottery state (for example, a bonus state) for performing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is started, and a specific condition (for example, 59 sheets) in the advantageous state lottery state is started. When the game state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that ends the advantageous state lottery state and the game state control means end the advantageous state lottery state with the medals being paid out), the advantageous state is said. Advantageous state lottery means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that draws whether or not to shift to the advantageous state lottery means, and advantageous state start means that shifts the state of performing the game to the advantageous state when the lottery of the advantageous state lottery means is won. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), and the advantageous state lottery state is The first lottery state (for example, BB mode 0) having the lowest probability of winning the transition lottery by the advantageous state lottery means, and the second lottery state (for example, BB mode 1) having a higher probability than the first lottery state. ), And a plurality of lottery states (eg, BB mode) including a third lottery state (eg, BB mode 2) in which the probability is higher than the first lottery state and the second lottery state, which is advantageous. The lottery state transition means is further provided with a lottery state transition means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for transitioning a plurality of the lottery states based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the state lottery state. Is determined as an internal winning combination of any one of the first combination and the first number combination including the second combination in the first lottery state in the first lottery state, and the second combination from the first lottery state. The lottery state is transitioned to the lottery state, and in the second lottery state, any one of the second number smaller than the first number including the first combination and not including the second combination among the plurality of combinations is inside. A gaming machine characterized in that the lottery state is changed from the second lottery state to the third lottery state when the winning combination is determined.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state at the end of the advantageous state lottery state. At this time, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of lottery states including a first lottery state, a second lottery state, and a third lottery state in which the probabilities of winning the transition lottery are different, and the inside in the advantageous state lottery state. A plurality of lottery states are transitioned based on the winning combination. As a result, the probability of winning the transition lottery can be changed based on the internal winning combination, so that the player has a strong interest in the internal winning combination in each game during the advantageous state lottery state, which is advantageous. State It is possible to enhance the interest during the lottery state.

In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, from the first lottery state to the second lottery state in which the probability of winning the transition lottery is higher, any of the first winning combination and the first winning combination including the second winning combination is internally won. A second number that transitions when determined as a combination and is less than the first number that includes the first combination and does not include the second combination from the second lottery state to the third lottery state where the probability of winning the transition lottery is higher. Transitions when any of the roles of is determined as an internal winning role. As a result, as the lottery state transitions, the types of roles that trigger the transition to a higher lottery state decrease, but the probability of winning the transition lottery increases with the transition of the lottery state. It is possible to create a game form in which the state is gradually upgraded. For the player, he is not interested in the result of one internal lottery during the advantageous state lottery state, but is interested in the series of internal lottery results during the advantageous state lottery state, which is an advantageous state. It is possible to enhance the interest during the lottery state.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

By the way, since the game in the advantageous state tends to be monotonous, in recent years, attempts to diversify the game playability in the advantageous state have been widely made. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-152165), a free game is played when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of fighter symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the free game is displayed on a liquid crystal display. By setting the number of remaining fighters on the player side of the shooting game displayed above, the game machines with various production and payout forms are disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine of the patent document, since the free game and the production (shooting game) are automatically progressed under the control of the game machine side, the progress of the game by the player cannot be reflected in the production content. , The player could not actively participate in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in an advantageous state by actively participating the player in the game. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A game machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The reel is rotated based on the window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. ), And based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to display the symbol on the symbol display means. A reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and an effective line provided on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped above, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined condition When the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state and the predetermined combination (for example, the push order bell) are determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, it is advantageous for the player. Notification means (for example, sub-control circuit 101, liquid crystal display device 11) for notifying information on such a stop operation (for example, information for displaying a combination of symbols having a large number of payouts) and prior to the start of the advantageous state. , The numerical determination means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character), and the current game during the advantageous state. Production information (for example, performance) in a plurality of games from to a predetermined number of games ahead The effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering (for example, setting in the apocalypse displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11) and the first effect information (for example, enemy ball) as the effect information. When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which is registered, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and the second effect information (for example, ally ball) is subtracted from the first numerical information. When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which is registered, the numerical update means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second predetermined value from the second numerical information and the numerical update means. As a result of the subtraction, when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is terminated, and when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is newly started (for example, sub-control). The circuit 101) is provided.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, during the advantageous state, the first numerical information and the second numerical information are subtracted based on the effect information and the internal winning combination, and the second numerical information is performed before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. If the numerical information can be less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is continued. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the player actively participates in the game in the advantageous state, and the motivation for the game can be improved. ..

Further, even when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the target to be subtracted (first numerical information or second numerical information) differs depending on the effect information registered in the game. For the player, since the first numerical information is subtracted when the first production information is registered, he does not want to win the predetermined role, and conversely, when the second production information is registered. Will want to win the prescribed role. Here, since the effect information is registered for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead, the player can play the game after grasping the effect information registered in advance. It is desired that the player wins the predetermined role at a timing advantageous to the player side (the second production information is registered). As a result, the registered production information and the start operation of the player can be strongly linked, and the player can play the game with a sense of tension, so that the interest in the advantageous state can be improved. it can.

In addition, since the predetermined combination for subtracting the first numerical information or the second numerical information is the combination to be notified, the determination of the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination affects the profit given during the advantageous state. Will give. For example, depending on the game machine, the role for which the first numerical information is subtracted is set as the first role (replay, etc.) that does not affect the profit, and the role for which the second numerical information is subtracted is the first role that affects the profit. It is also possible to have two roles (bell, etc.). In such a game machine, the presence or absence of a winning second role that affects profits is directly linked to the continuation of the advantageous state, and the game becomes monotonous. In this respect, as in the game machine according to the present invention, the winning of the predetermined role that affects the profit is made advantageous / disadvantageous according to the registered production information, so that the game playability in the advantageous state can be improved. It can be diversified and can enhance the interest in a favorable state.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

By the way, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, it is common to shift the gaming state based on the winning or winning of a so-called rare role such as watermelon or cherry. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-048945), the RT operation symbols 1 and 2 displayed when the cherries 1, 2 and 3 are determined as the internal winning combination are displayed during a predetermined period. By doing so, it is disclosed that the gaming state is shifted to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Here, since the internal winning combination is determined according to the start operation of the player, the operation of the player is reflected in the result of the game by shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery as in the patent document. It is possible to realize the playability in which the player actively participates in the game.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since so-called rare roles such as watermelon and cherry have a low winning probability, when the gaming state is changed depending on the presence or absence of winning of a rare role as in the game machine of the patent document, depending on the player, even once during the period. There is a possibility that you will not get a chance, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the game state is changed regardless of the operation of the player, but in such a game machine, the game progresses according to the operation of the player, which is different from the original game property of the pachislot machine. Since decisions that affect the profits to be given will be made, the suitability as a pachislot machine may be lacking and the fairness of the game may be impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state rich in game playability while associating with the result of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has, as a state for playing a game, a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the normal state. A gaming machine having a chance zone (for example, CZ) having a high probability of shifting to the advantageous state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels. A symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the screen, and a start operation detection means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a start switch 64) for detecting a start operation by a player. A symbol changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, and a start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of, the first symbol combination (for example, the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct) or the second symbol combination (for example, push) is determined according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal winning combination determining means) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a push order combination (for example, a push order bell) that can stop and display the combination of symbols displayed when the order is incorrect. For example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to change the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of a reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) to be stopped and a symbol stopped on an effective line provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the above, a winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined condition (for example, apocalypse) in the normal state. When the lottery is satisfied, the lottery state start means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that starts the CZ lottery state (for example, the normal gaming state during the apocalypse operation) for performing the transition lottery to the chance zone, and the CZ. Production information in multiple games from the current game to the game ahead of a predetermined number of times during the lottery state In the effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and fixed balls) and the game in which the effect information is registered, the first item is placed on the effective line. When the symbol combination of 1 is displayed, the CZ lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the reel of FIG. 72) that performs the transition lottery to the chance zone with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game. During the CZ lottery state, the game state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that shifts the game state to the chance zone based on the result of the ART lottery table at the time of stop and the transition lottery of the CZ lottery means. The lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the CZ lottery state when the push order combination is determined a predetermined number of times as the internal winning combination (for example, when the guaranteed number of times becomes 0) is provided. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is shifted from the CZ lottery state to the chance zone based on the effect information registered in advance for a predetermined number of games including the current game. Here, since the production information is registered regardless of the operation of the player, simply shifting the game state based on the production information lacks suitability as a game machine and impairs the fairness of the game. There is a risk that it will end up. In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, not only the effect information registered for each game but also the combination of the symbols displayed in the game is taken into consideration to shift the game state. As a result, the operation of the player can be intervened in the transition of the game state, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Here, since the first symbol combination that triggers the transition of the game state is a combination of symbols displayed when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the above-mentioned rare combination is transferred to the gaming state. Compared to the case where it is an opportunity, it is possible to give the player more opportunities to have a sense of expectation regarding the transition to the gaming state. That is, in the first symbol combination that requires not only winning as an internal winning combination but also the order of stop operations, the winning probability can be set higher than that of the rare winning combination, so that an opportunity to have a sense of expectation (push). It is possible to give a lot of (determined as an internal winning role), and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the game state transition lottery is performed with a probability according to the effect information registered for the game in which the first symbol combination is displayed, so that the player can operate the game. The transition of the gaming state can be performed in various ways while associating with the result of the accompanying game. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to shift the gaming state in a manner rich in game play while associating it with the result of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the CZ lottery state is terminated when the push order combination is determined a predetermined number of times as the internal winning combination during the CZ lottery state. By using the push order combination that triggers the transition of the game state to the end condition of the CZ lottery state in this way, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to receive the transition lottery during the CZ lottery state. As a result, the player can avoid the situation where he / she has no chance to receive the transition lottery, and can prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

By the way, in a game machine equipped with an ART function, a chance zone with a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed to shift to the ART state with a high probability. .. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internal. A gaming machine that controls the transition to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a patented gaming machine, the player's interest in the chance zone will be focused on whether or not a particular symbol combination is displayed. By the way, whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed depends on the result of the internal lottery, so depending on the player, there is a possibility that the specific symbol combination will be displayed in the chance zone. May not be obtained, or the chances of such a possibility may be extremely small. In such a case, the player may not be able to obtain any chance even though he / she has moved to the chance zone, and the interest of the game may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period of time, which triggers a transition to an advantageous state advantageous for the player. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) and an internal winning combination that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A determination means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detection means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the above. The symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the reel stop control means stops on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination of symbols, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the predetermined condition as an opportunity, the above-mentioned A lottery state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to an advantageous state, and shifting to the advantageous state in the transition lottery. A mode transition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the winning mode (for example, CZ mode) that defines the probability of determining the reels based on the number of unit games elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state, and the advantageous state. When a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the lottery state, the advantageous state lottery means (for example, sub) that performs the transition lottery based on the current winning mode. By the control circuit 101) and the advantageous state lottery means When the transition lottery is performed, a game is played when it is determined by the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state and the transition to the advantageous state by the transition lottery. The mode transition means includes an advantageous state transition means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that shifts the state to the advantageous state, and the mode transition means has the probability based on the number of unit games elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. A unit game in which the lowest first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) is shifted to the second mode (for example, CZ mode 1) having a higher probability than the first mode, and the unit game has elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the mode shifts to the third mode (for example, CZ mode 2) having the highest probability, and when the lottery state starting means starts the advantageous state lottery state, the mode shifts. The means further includes a transition time determining means (for example, CZ_MAP, sub-control circuit 101) for determining the number of unit games to be shifted from the first mode to the second mode.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) in which the transition lottery to the advantageous state advantageous for the player is performed, the transition lottery is performed when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the transition lottery is performed, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated. Here, in a gaming machine that performs a transition lottery to an advantageous state based on an internal winning combination, depending on the player, the transition lottery may not be received at all during the advantageous state lottery state, but the gaming machine according to the present invention. Then, as the advantageous state lottery state continues, the winning mode that defines the probability of winning the transition lottery rises, and it becomes easier to win the transition lottery. Contrary to the conventional game machine, in such a game machine, it is advantageous for the player that the predetermined winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state, and the game in the advantageous state lottery state is conventionally performed. It is possible to have no playability, and it is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state lottery state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state starts, the number of unit games for shifting the winning mode from the first mode to the second mode is determined. As a result, the timing at which the winning mode goes up to the advantageous mode for the player is different for each advantageous state lottery state, so that the games in the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified, and the game in the advantageous state lottery state can be diversified. You can improve your interest.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelons and cherries are specified as internal winning roles. A game machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this game machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for the continuation of AT and ART is high. Concentrating only on one game, the player's expectations could not be sustained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuing an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. A combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. It is displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the reel stop control means stops on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination of the symbols, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined condition as an opportunity. Advantageous state start means (for example, sub-control circuit) for starting the advantageous state including the first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state. 101), a first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state control means that controls the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), the first advantageous state control means provides effect information (for example,) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead during the first advantageous state. The first effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering the effect ball) and the effect information are duplicated. Second advantageous state starting means for ending the first advantageous state and starting the second advantageous state in a game in which any one of several types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), the second advantageous state control means provides effect information (for example,) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead during the second advantageous state. In a game in which a second effect information registration means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for registering an effect ball) and a second effect information (for example, an enemy ball) are registered as the effect information, the first numerical information (for example, an enemy ball) is registered. The first numerical value corresponding to the type of the first effect information (for example, the attack power of the enemy character) registered at the end of the first advantageous state is subtracted from the HP of the ally character, and also as the effect information. From the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) in the game in which the third effect information (for example, a ally ball) is registered, the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state (for example) For example, when the numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts the second numerical value according to the defense power of the enemy character) and the subtraction of the numerical value subtracting means result in the first numerical value information being less than the threshold value, the said It is characterized by including an advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that newly starts the first advantageous state when the advantageous state is terminated and the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, whether or not the advantageous state continues is determined by a plurality of games. It will be different depending on the game result of. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the previous game multiple times, and the player will be interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , It is possible to improve the interest in the advantageous state.

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the subtraction amount of the numerical information is made different according to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, not only the result of the game in the first advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state affects the presence or absence of the continuation of the advantageous state, so that the player is interested in the continuation of the advantageous state multiple times. It can be sustained throughout the game. Further, by separately determining the subtraction amount of the first numerical value information (first numerical value) and the subtraction amount of the second numerical value (second numerical value), for example, both the subtraction amount of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information can be obtained. The subtraction amount of the first numerical information can be large / small, and the subtraction amount of the second numerical information can be small / large, so that the games in the second advantageous state can be varied. Can be transformed into. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest in the advantageous state.

[Appendix 9]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelons and cherries are specified as internal winning roles. A game machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this game machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for the continuation of AT and ART is high. Concentrating only on one game, the player's expectations could not be sustained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuing an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. A combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. It is displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the reel stop control means stops on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination of the symbols, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined condition as an opportunity. Advantageous state start means (for example, sub-control circuit) for starting the advantageous state including the first advantageous state (for example, enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state. 101), a first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state control means that controls the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101), the first advantageous state control means provides effect information (for example,) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead during the first advantageous state. The first effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering the effect ball) and the first effect information 1 Numerical addition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for adding a predetermined number to the first numerical information (for example, HP of a ally character) in a game in which 1 effect information (for example, a ally ball) is registered, and the effect information. With the second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state in the game in which the second effect information (for example, the boss ball) is registered as The second advantageous state control means registers the effect information (for example, the effect ball) in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead during the second advantageous state. In the game in which the information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the third effect information (for example, the enemy ball) are registered as the effect information, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information. Numerical subtraction means (for example, sub-control circuit) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character) in a game in which a fourth effect information (for example, a ally ball) is registered as the effect information. 101) and, as a result of the subtraction of the numerical value subtracting means, the advantageous state is terminated when the first numerical value information is less than the threshold value, and the first advantageous state is newly started when the second numerical value information is less than the threshold value. It is characterized by comprising an advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101).

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game in the second advantageous state, whether or not the advantageous state continues is determined by a plurality of games. It will be different depending on the game result of. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the previous game multiple times, and the player will be interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , It is possible to improve the interest in the advantageous state.

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first numerical information that triggers the end of the advantageous state is added based on the first effect information registered during the first advantageous state. By adding a large amount of the first numerical information during the first advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the first numerical information from decreasing to less than the threshold value in the subsequent second advantageous state. As a result, not only the result of the game in the first advantageous state but also the result of the game in the first advantageous state affects the continuation of the advantageous state, so that the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state is spread over multiple games. Can be sustained.

[Appendix 10]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelons and cherries are specified as internal winning roles. A game machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this game machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and the player's expectation for the continuation of AT and ART is high. Concentrating only on one game, the player's expectations could not be sustained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of sustaining a player's interest in continuing an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) over a plurality of games. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a battle ART in an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A game machine, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The reel is rotated based on the window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. ), And based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to display the symbol on the symbol display means. A reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and an effective line provided on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped above, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined condition are applied. As an opportunity, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for starting the advantageous state, and the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the second numerical information (for example, HP of the ally character) prior to the start of the advantageous state. For example, a determination means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for determining the HP of an enemy character, and effect information (for example, an effect ball) in a plurality of games from the current game to a predetermined number of times ahead during the advantageous state. ) Is registered (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the first predetermined value is set from the first numerical information in the game in which the first effect information (for example, the enemy ball) is registered as the effect information. A play that is subtracted and a second effect information (for example, a ally ball) is registered as the effect information. In the technique, when the numerical value updating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts the second predetermined value from the second numerical value information and the result of the subtraction of the numerical value updating means are less than the threshold value, the advantageous state The effect information registration means includes the advantageous state control means (for example, the sub control circuit 101) that newly starts the advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. When the first effect information is continuously registered a specific number of times (for example, four times) as the effect information in the game, the second effect information is stored as the effect information following the first effect information that is continuous a specific number of times. It is characterized by registering.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value before the first numerical information becomes less than the threshold value. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed based on the effect information registered for each game, whether or not the advantageous state continues depends on the game result of a plurality of games. It will be different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player's interest in the continuation of the advantageous state can be maintained over a plurality of games.

Further, the effect information for subtracting the numerical information is registered in advance not only for the current game but also for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. For the player, it is possible to grasp the flow of the subsequent game from the contents of the effect information registered in advance up to the previous game multiple times, and the player will be interested not only in the current game but also in the subsequent game. , It is possible to improve the interest in the advantageous state.

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first effect information that triggers the end of the advantageous state is continuously registered a specific number of times, the second effect that triggers the continuation of the advantageous state as the subsequent effect information. Register the information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous situation for the player from continuing for a long period of time, so that the player can play the game in the advantageous state with peace of mind.

[Appendix 11]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a game machine, there is known a game machine that notifies information that is advantageous to the player so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075738), when the bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination is carried over at the time of turning off the power until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed, the power supply after the power is turned off. A game machine that announces that the bonus combination has been carried over when restarting due to reintroduction is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, there is a problem that the fairness among the players is impaired because the bonus starts immediately when the power is turned on. Also, in a game machine, it is common to clear the information about the game once when the setting is changed, so for example, the game ends with the bonus role carried over the day before, and the announcement is made the next day. By confirming whether or not the set value is changed, the player can grasp whether or not the set value has changed from the previous day. Being able to grasp whether or not the set value has been changed in this way not only impairs fairness among the players, but also may impair the interest of the player when the player judges that the setting is low. There is sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that guarantees fairness among players.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. By stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the reel is displayed on the symbol display means. On an effective line provided on the symbol display means when the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped at, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined number of times from the current game. The effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for registering the effect information (for example, the effect balls such as the lottery balls 1 to 4 and the fixed balls) in the multiple games up to the previous game, and the effect information are registered. When a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the effective line in the game being played, the privilege granting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that grants the privilege based on the effect information registered for the game , A power-on detecting means for detecting the power-on (for example, a main control circuit 91, a sub-control circuit 101, a power supply board 44b), and an acquisition means for acquiring the date and time when the power-on detecting means detects the power-on (for example). , Main control circuit 91, sub-control circuit 101, power supply board 44b), and the effect information registration means discard the registered effect information based on the date and time acquired by the acquisition means, and play a plurality of times. It is characterized by newly registering the production information in.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the registered effect information is rewritten with new effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on. From the date and time when the power is turned on, it can be seen that it is, for example, the time before business at the amusement store, and by comparing it with the date and time when the power is turned off, it is before business on the next day. Therefore, by rewriting the production information based on the date and time when the power is turned on, the production information registered when the power was turned off the previous day and the production information registered when the power was turned on the next day will always be different. , The player cannot grasp whether or not the set value has been changed from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players.

Here, since this effect information is used for the transition lottery to the advantageous state by the transition lottery means, fairness among the players can be further ensured. That is, for example, even if the effect information having a high (or low) expectation of transition to an advantageous state is registered when the power is turned off the previous day, it is rewritten to new effect information when the power is turned on the next day, so that the situation on the previous day It is possible to prevent unfair treatment between a player who knows the above and a player who does not.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to control the rewriting of the effect information based on the date and time when the power is turned on, before and after the power is turned off, for example, when the power must be temporarily turned off during business hours. The situation of the game machine can be maintained. For the player, even if the power is temporarily turned off when the effect information that is advantageous to him / her is registered, the advantageous effect information will be maintained after the power is turned on again, which is dissatisfied. You can play the game without feeling it.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes power supply disconnection detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, sub control circuit 101, power supply board 44b) for detecting power supply disconnection, and the acquisition means is said to power supply disconnection detection. The date and time when the means detects the power off is acquired, and the time from the power off to the power on is acquired from the date and time when the power off is detected and the power on is detected. When the time acquired by the acquisition means is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours), the effect information registration means maintains the registered effect information, and the time acquired by the acquisition means is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. If this is the case, the registered effect information is discarded, and the effect information in the plurality of games is newly registered.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the time from turning off the power to turning on the power again is longer than a predetermined time, the registered effect information is rewritten with new effect information. As a result, the player who plays the game the next day cannot grasp whether or not the set value has been changed from the registered effect information, and does not impair the fairness among the players. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the time from turning off the power to turning on the power again is less than a predetermined time, the registered effect information is maintained without being rewritten. As a result, even if the power is temporarily turned off when the effect information that is advantageous to the player is registered, the effect information that is advantageous to the player is maintained even after the power is turned on again. You can play the game without feeling dissatisfied.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the effect information registration means discards the registered effect information and newly registers the effect information in a plurality of games, the effect information determined by lottery is newly added. It is characterized by being registered as effective production information.

As a method of making it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value has been changed, it is possible to set the effect information to the initial state when the power is turned on the next day, but in such a method, the situation becomes the same in a plurality of game machines. As a result, the variety of games is diminished. In this respect, the gaming machine according to the present invention is suitable because new effect information is registered by lottery when the power is turned on the next day, so that the variety of games can be ensured.

[Appendix 12]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, there is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize a gaming state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, a gaming machine in which the combination of symbols displayed is different according to the stop operation of the player is widely known, and when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, when the combination of the first symbol is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the combination of the second symbol is displayed as the result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. There are also known game machines that do not.

In a gaming machine that controls the gaming state according to the combination of symbols displayed in this way, the player can avoid the sub-control board from grasping that the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. There are known fraudulent acts such as command spills that give unfair profits. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, a command including information about the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be acquired on the sub-control board side. It is possible to avoid a disadvantageous state for the player, and as a result, the player gains an unfair advantage.

Therefore, when a player commits an illegal act during the game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a game machine that notifies that the error has occurred is provided. It is already known (see, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-059616)). In such a game machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decorative lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and the clerk at the game hall is made aware that fraudulent activity is being performed. Can be terminated, so that a fraudulent act that induces a sequence error is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the profit of the game.

In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, the game is performed by performing a stop operation three times following the operation of the start lever, so the order of commands transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. By checking the order of the commands acquired by the sub-control board, it is possible to identify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine as described above, when the liquid crystal display device is not installed, even if the sequence error notification is executed by the sound and the decorative lamp, it is confused with the production of other game machines in the game hall. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of notifying the clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted, and the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by cheating.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing illegally obtaining profits of a game by fraudulent acts.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The reel is rotated on condition that the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation detection means have detected the start operation. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the symbol by making the reels, and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. By stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the reel is displayed on the symbol display means. On an effective line provided on the symbol display means when the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. Based on the combination of the symbols stopped at, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and a predetermined condition as a trigger. As a result, a lottery state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for starting an advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) for performing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and a predetermined number in the advantageous state lottery state. In the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that performs the transition lottery for determining the transition to the advantageous state with a predetermined probability after the unit game (for example, 30 games) has elapsed, and in the advantageous state lottery state. When a predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the effective line, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the advantageous state lottery state and the transition lottery result of the advantageous state lottery means are used. , Game state control means (for example, sub-control circuit) for shifting the game state to the advantageous state. 101) and a game order determining means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for determining the progress order of one game are provided, and in the lottery state ending means, the game progresses in a predetermined order by the game order determining means. When it is determined that the situation is not present (for example, when a sequence error occurs), the advantageous state lottery state is terminated.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone) that starts with a predetermined condition as a trigger, a predetermined number of unit games that the advantageous state lottery state ends are performed. 2 Since the right-granting lottery is performed, it is possible to realize a so-called finish-type chance zone in which a lottery is performed to an advantageous state at the time of completion. Since this advantageous state lottery state ends when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the player performs a stop operation hoping that the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in order to avoid the end.

In addition, if a predetermined symbol combination is displayed during the advantageous state lottery state, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated, but the displayed symbol combination is lost (cannot be grasped) due to fraudulent activity or the like. Advantageous state The lottery state is temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and if the progress has not progressed in a predetermined order, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated to play the game. Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is zeroed, the advantageous state lottery state is not unreasonably maintained, and the player gains an unfair profit by cheating. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the advantageous state lottery means shifts to the advantageous state when the internal winning combination determining means determines the winning combination capable of displaying the predetermined symbol combination as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by further performing a transition lottery determined with a specific probability.

In a game in which a winning combination capable of displaying a predetermined symbol combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the advantageous state lottery state may end due to the display of the predetermined symbol combination, but the transition to the advantageous state occurs. You can get more lottery. Since this transition lottery is performed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the more the advantageous state lottery state continues, the more the winning combination is performed. Therefore, if the progress result of the game is zeroed and the displayed symbol combination cannot be grasped, it is possible to receive an unreasonably large number of lottery for transition to an advantageous state triggered by the winning combination. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the advantageous state lottery state is terminated regardless of the symbol combination, so that the player may obtain an unreasonable profit by cheating. Can be prevented.

[Appendix 13]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), AT is provided according to the internal winning combination including a bonus. And game machines that determine the period of ART (the number of assist games) have been proposed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may become monotonous and the player may get bored. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method that has never existed before regarding a method for determining a period such as AT.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91) and the internal winning combination determining means that determines the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning. Variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the first advantage, triggered by a predetermined condition. With the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that starts the advantageous state including the state (for example, the enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state. A first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state control means (for example, for example) that controls the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. The first advantageous state control means includes a sub-control circuit 101), and the first advantageous state control means has a plurality of types of second effect information (for example, boss balls) having different expectations for continuation of the advantageous state from the first effect information (for example, ally balls). A predetermined number (for example, 6) of production information is determined from a plurality of types of production information (for example, production balls) including 1 to 8), and the performance is performed. The effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) stored in the output information storage means (for example, the sub RAM 103) and the predetermined number of effect information stored in the effect information storage means, which are less than a predetermined number. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that displays a number (for example, 5) of effect information as effect information in a specific number of games including the current game, and a first effect information as effect information in the current game. In the displayed game, the numerical addition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that adds the first predetermined value to the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character) and the internal winning combination determination means are specific combinations (for example). , Rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific combination rewriting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that rewrites the second effect information stored in the effect information storage means to the first effect information, and the current game. A second advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control) that ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state in a game in which any one of a plurality of types of second effect information is registered as the effect information. The second advantageous state control means includes the circuit 101), and the second advantageous state control means corresponds to the type of the second effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the first numerical information according to the first condition. 1 A specific value is subtracted, and a second according to the type of the second effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) according to the second condition. When the numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting a specific value and the numerical value subtracting means reduce the value to less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is terminated and the second numerical value information becomes the said. It is characterized by comprising a continuous control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that continues an advantageous state when the value becomes less than the threshold value.

In such a game machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information becomes the threshold value first. If it is less than, it will continue, so the larger the value of the first numerical information, the easier it is for the advantageous state to continue, and the period of the advantageous state will be extended. The value of the first numerical information is added in the game in which the first effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the second effect information is displayed during the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state in which the first numerical information is added ends and the first numerical information is subtracted in the second advantageous state. It shifts to the state. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game, instead of simply controlling the period of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination. The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed production information, and can make the control of the period of the advantageous state rich in playability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, the second effect information that ends the first advantageous state is rewritten into the first effect information. By rewriting the second production information to the first production information, it is possible to expect that the first numerical information will be added thereafter. Therefore, the player can expect not only the displayed production information but also the first numerical information. We will also pay attention to the internal winning role. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more playable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination rewriting means is a specific second, in which the expected degree of continuation of an advantageous state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value among the production information in the specific number of games displayed on the display means. The effect information is maintained without being rewritten as the first effect information.

As described above, the larger the first numerical value information is, the easier it is for the advantageous state to continue, but since the multiple types of second production information have different expectations for the continuation of the advantageous state, the second production information that is easy to continue is used as an opportunity. 2 When the advantageous state starts, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue thereafter. If the second effect information, in which such an advantageous state is likely to continue, is rewritten with the first effect information, it may be difficult for the advantageous state to continue. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific second effect information in which the expected degree of continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten as the first effect information. As a result, the determination of the period of the advantageous state can be made more playable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination rewriting means is stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means, and the specific second effect information is the first effect information. It is characterized by being rewritten to.

In such a game machine, the specific second effect information that is maintained without being rewritten as the first effect information is limited to the one that is displayed on the display means, and the one that is simply stored without being displayed is the first. 1 Rewrite to production information. Since the hidden production information cannot be grasped by the player, by rewriting such production information into the first production information, the profit obtained by the player without giving dissatisfaction to the player can be obtained. You can balance it.

[Appendix 14]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), AT is provided according to the internal winning combination including a bonus. And game machines that determine the period of ART (the number of assist games) have been proposed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may become monotonous and the player may get bored. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method that has never existed before regarding a method for determining a period such as AT.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91) and the internal winning combination determining means that determines the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning. Variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the first advantage, triggered by a predetermined condition. With the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that starts the advantageous state including the state (for example, the enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state. A first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state control means (for example, for example) that controls the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. The first advantageous state control means is provided with a sub-control circuit 101), and the first advantageous state control means has a predetermined number (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) from a plurality of types of effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) having different expectations for continuation of the advantageous state. The effect information registration (for example, the effect ball) of 6) is determined and stored in the effect information storage means (for example, the sub RAM 103). A specific number (for example, 5) of the recording means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the predetermined number of the effect information stored in the effect information storage means, which is smaller than the predetermined number, can be used in the current game. When the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) displayed as the effect information in the specified number of games including the game and the internal winning combination determining means determine the specific combination (for example, the combination related to BB) as the internal winning combination, the above A profit state rewriting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that rewrites one or more effect information stored in the storage means to new effect information, and a game in which predetermined effect information is displayed as effect information in the current game. When a specific condition is satisfied in (for example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination), the second advantageous state starting means (for example, sub) that ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state. The second advantageous state control means includes a control circuit 101) and, according to the first condition (for example, when the push order bell is won when the enemy ball is set), from the first numerical information at the end of the first advantageous state. The first specific value according to the type of the registered effect information is subtracted, and the first advantage is obtained from the second numerical information according to the second condition (for example, when the push order bell is won when the ally ball is set). As a result of the numerical value subtracting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for subtracting the second specific value according to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the state and the numerical value subtracting means, the first numerical value information is the threshold value. It is characterized by including a continuous control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that terminates the advantageous state when the value is less than the threshold value and continues the advantageous state when the second numerical value information is less than the threshold value.

In such a game machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information becomes the threshold value first. If it becomes less than, it will continue. Here, since the subtraction of the first numerical value information and the second numerical value information is performed according to the type of the effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state, the effect information displayed during the first advantageous state is It will affect the duration of the favorable condition. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, not only the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the internal winning combination, but the period of the advantageous state is controlled based on the effect information displayed in the current game. , The player pays attention not only to the internal winning combination but also to the currently displayed production information, and the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made rich in playability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the first advantageous state, one or a plurality of effect information stored in the effect information storage means is rewritten into new effect information. .. As a result, when the production information is rewritten with the production information having a high continuation expectation of the advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and conversely, when the production information is rewritten with the production information with a low continuation expectation of the advantageous state. Since the situation is disadvantageous for the player, the player pays attention not only to the displayed production information but also to the internal winning combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more playable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means is the specific effect information in which the expected degree of continuation of the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value among the effect information in the specific number of games displayed on the display means. Is characterized in that it is maintained without being rewritten with new production information.

According to such a game machine, even if a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the specific effect information whose continuation expectation is equal to or higher than a predetermined value is maintained without being rewritten to another effect information. As a result, if the specific production information is included in the specific number of production information displayed, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a profit from the specific production information. Therefore, the player expects. You can take it and play the game after that, and the interest of the game will improve.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit state rewriting means rewrites the specific effect information stored in the effect information storage means without being displayed on the display means with new effect information. It is characterized by.

In such a game machine, the specific effect information that is maintained without being rewritten to another effect information is limited to the one that is being displayed on the display means, and the one that is simply stored without being displayed is another effect. Rewrite to information. Since the hidden production information cannot be grasped by the player, by rewriting such production information with another production information, the profit obtained by the player without dissatisfaction with the player can be obtained. You can balance it.

[Appendix 15]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147803), AT is provided according to the internal winning combination including a bonus. And game machines that determine the period of ART (the number of assist games) have been proposed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, if the number of assist games is simply determined based on the internal winning combination as in the patent document, the game may become monotonous and the player may get bored. Therefore, there is a demand for a new method that has never existed before regarding a method for determining a period such as AT.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning. Variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the first advantage, triggered by a predetermined condition. With the advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that starts the advantageous state including the state (for example, the enemy determination ART) and the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) performed following the first advantageous state. A first advantageous state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state control means (for example, for example) that controls the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. The first advantageous state control means includes a sub-control circuit 101), and the first advantageous state control means includes a plurality of types of first effect information (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) having different expectations for continuation of the advantageous state. Lottery information that defines lottery value information (for example, boss MAP data) for determining production information from (for example, production balls) The lottery information storage means (for example, the ROM cartridge substrate 76) that stores a plurality of information (for example, the boss MAP) and the lottery information of one of the plurality of lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means are produced information. When the production information is determined based on the one lottery information, the lottery information for determining the production information is updated from the one lottery information to another lottery information. Based on the lottery information determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the boss MAP lottery table) and the lottery information determined by the lottery information determining means, the production in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. When a specific condition is satisfied in the effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that determines the information and the game in which any one of a plurality of types of first effect information is registered as the effect information in the current game. (For example, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination), the second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state. The second advantageous state control means is a continuous control means (for example,) that controls whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the type of the first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. , Sub-control circuit 101), and the lottery information storage means includes special first effect information (for example,) in which the continuation expectation degree of the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value as the information of the lottery value for determining the first effect information. , The special lottery information (for example, the boss MAP52) specified only for the boss balls 7, 8) is stored, and when the lottery information determining means determines the special lottery information as the lottery information for determining the effect information, It is characterized in that the special lottery information is maintained without updating the special lottery information to other lottery information.

Such a game machine has a plurality of types of first effect information having different expectations for continuation of the advantageous state, and can be used as the type of first effect information determined for the game at the end of the first advantageous state. Based on this, the presence or absence of continuation of the advantageous state is controlled. From the player's point of view, he / she will be keenly interested in the type of production information currently displayed, and compared to the conventional game machine that controls the period of advantageous state simply based on the internal winning combination. The control of the period of advantage can be made more playable.

Here, in the game machine according to the present invention, the effect information to be registered for a predetermined game is determined from a plurality of types of effect information based on the lottery information, and the lottery information is newly added each time the effect information is determined. Update to the lottery information. The lottery information includes special lottery information that determines only the special first effect information whose continuation expectation of the advantageous state is equal to or higher than the predetermined value as the first effect information that triggers the end of the first advantageous state. Once the lottery information is updated up to the special lottery information, the special lottery information is maintained without being updated from this special lottery information to other lottery information. As a result, once the special lottery information is updated, only the special first production information having a high expectation of continuation of the advantageous state is determined as the first production information, so that the player can use the production information. It will also pay attention to the lottery information for determining the above, and the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more playable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuous control means of the second advantageous state control means has first numerical information (for example, when the push order bell is won when the enemy ball is set) according to the first condition (for example, when the enemy ball is set). , The HP of the ally character), the first specific value corresponding to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state is subtracted, and the second condition (for example, the push order at the time of setting the ally ball) is subtracted. Numerical subtraction means for subtracting the second specific value according to the type of the first effect information registered at the end of the first advantageous state from the second numerical information (for example, the HP of the enemy character) according to the bell winning). For example, as a result of subtraction of the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical value subtracting means, the advantageous state is terminated when the first numerical value information is less than the threshold value, and the advantageous state is continued when the second numerical value information is less than the threshold value. A continuous control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) is provided, and the special lottery information (for example, boss MAPs 52 and 53) includes the special first effect information and the second effect from a plurality of types of effect information. The lottery value information is defined so that the information (for example, the ally ball) can be determined, and the first advantageous state control means becomes the first numerical information in the game in which the second effect information is determined as the effect information in the current game. It is further provided with a numerical value adding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for adding a first predetermined value.

In such a game machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value in the second advantageous state, and the second numerical information becomes the threshold value first. If it becomes less than, it will continue. In this case, by prescribing the lottery value information for the second production information to which the first numerical value information is added to the special lottery information described above, it is advantageous once the special lottery information is updated. Only the special first effect information or the second effect information to which the first numerical information is added, which is highly expected to continue the state, is determined. As a result, when the special first production information is determined, the degree of expectation for continuation of the advantageous state increases as described above, and when the second production information is determined, the first numerical information is increased and the second effect information is determined. Since it is difficult for the numerical information to be reduced to less than the threshold value, the degree of expectation for the continuation of the advantageous state is similarly increased. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, once the special lottery information is updated, the player can expect that the advantageous state will continue, so that the player determines the production information. By paying attention to the lottery information for the invention, it is possible to control the period of the advantageous state with abundant playability.

[Appendix 16]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time. Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to give players a sense of expectation regarding the continuation of AT and ART. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045992), AT and ART continue. A game machine that maintains a sense of expectation over multiple games has been proposed by notifying whether or not to do so based on the outcome of the battle production.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the battle production in the conventional game machine such as the patent document, the winning / losing result is predetermined by the continuous lottery performed at the start of the battle production, so that the player is interested in the production content of the battle production. There is a risk that the battle production itself will become unattractive because it will focus only on the result of the game without going.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of controlling a period of AT or the like by a method rich in game playability.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning. Variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition. A plurality of types of effect information (for example, effect ball) including an advantageous state start means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) and a first effect information (for example, enemy ball) and a second effect information (for example, ally ball). ), The effect information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that determines the effect information to be registered for a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead with a predetermined probability, and the effect information. In the game in which the first effect information is registered as, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information (for example, the HP of the ally character), and in the game in which the second effect information is registered as the effect information. Numerical subtraction means (for example, sub-control circuit 10) for subtracting a second predetermined value from the second numerical information (for example, HP of an enemy character). 1) and, as a result of the subtraction of the numerical value subtracting means, when the first numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is terminated, and when the second numerical value information becomes less than the threshold value, the advantageous state is newly started. When the first numerical value information becomes less than the change threshold value as a result of subtraction between the state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the numerical value subtraction means, the effect information registration means registers the first effect information. It is characterized by comprising a probability changing means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for changing the probability determined as.

In such a game machine, the advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information falls below the threshold value first, and continues when the second numerical information falls below the threshold value first. .. Here, the subtraction of the first numerical information and the second numerical information is performed based on the type of the registered effect information, and in the game in which the first effect information is registered, the first numerical information is subtracted and the first numerical information is subtracted. 2 In the game in which the effect information is registered, the second numerical information is subtracted. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the continuation of the advantageous state is controlled based on the type of the registered effect information. As a result, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which the presence or absence of continuation is predetermined, the gaming machine according to the present invention is in an advantageous state because the presence or absence of continuation differs depending on the flow of the game in the advantageous state. The control of the period can be made playful.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first numerical value information becomes less than the change threshold value, the probability of determining the first effect information as the effect information to be registered is changed. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to determine the first effect information, and then it becomes difficult to subtract the first numerical information, and the advantageous state is likely to continue. On the contrary, for example, since the first effect information is easily determined, the first numerical information is easily subtracted thereafter, and it becomes difficult for the advantageous state to continue. In this way, by changing the probability of determining the effect information based on the value of the first numerical information, the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more playable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an opponent determining means (for example, a sub) that determines one attribute information from a plurality of types of attribute information (for example, the type of enemy character) associated with the second numerical information. The control circuit 101) is further provided, and the probability changing means changes the probability to the first probability when the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means is the first attribute information, and the opponent determining means When the determined attribute information is the second attribute information, the probability is changed to a second probability different from the first probability.

According to such a game machine, the changed probability of determining the effect information differs depending on the type of attribute information associated with the second numerical information. Therefore, for example, depending on the opponent in the battle effect. The probability after the change can be different. As a result, even if the first numerical information is reduced to the change threshold value and the advantageous state is about to end, it is possible to perform an effect such that it is easy to reverse depending on the opponent in the battle effect, so that the period of the advantageous state can be controlled. Can be made even more playable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the change threshold value that triggers the probability changing means to change the probability differs depending on the attribute information determined by the opponent determining means.

According to such a game machine, the change threshold value differs depending on the type of attribute information associated with the second numerical information. Therefore, for example, the probability of determining the effect information according to the opponent in the battle effect. The timing of making changes can be different. As a result, for example, in the battle production, the timing at which the reversal is likely to occur can be set to various timings, so that the control of the period of the advantageous state can be made more playable.

[Appendix 17]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, there is also known a gaming machine in which various decorative members (for example, movable accessories) are provided in the gaming machine and the decorative members are moved according to the progress of the game to enhance the game playability. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-237715) discloses a gaming machine that notifies a player of an internal winning combination by operating a movable accessory based on the result of an internal lottery. There is.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine of the patent document, the movable accessory is simply operated to notify the result of the internal lottery, and for the player, the notification content is too easy to understand and gradually gets tired, and the movable type. There was a risk that interest in the character would diminish. If the player's interest diminishes, the operating rate of the game machine also decreases. Therefore, in a game machine equipped with a movable accessory, it is necessary to devise a device that does not diminish the interest in the movable accessory.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing a game without making the player bored.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, a CZ or ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. An effect of registering effect information used in a predetermined game from a plurality of effect information (for example, effect balls such as lottery balls 1 to 4 and fixed balls) having different expectations regarding the transition to the advantageous state. When the information registration means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a predetermined condition (for example, the operation of the apocalypse) are satisfied in the normal state, the registered display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) displays the registered effect information. In the game in which the display means displays the effect information, the transition lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that performs the transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the displayed effect information, and the above. A game state control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that shifts the game state to the advantageous state based on the result of the shift lottery of the shift lottery means, and a movable accessory (for example, a rotating combination) capable of a predetermined operation. The object 200), the accessory control means for controlling the operation of the movable accessory (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the rotating accessory control board 78), and the light emitting device (for example, the eyeball) that emits light of the movable accessory. An LED provided behind the main body 203), a light emitting control means for controlling the light emission of the light emitting device (for example, a sub control circuit 101, an LED control board provided behind the eyeball main body 203), and the display means. In a game in which the player does not display the effect information, the accessory movable lottery means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory and the accessory movable lottery means are movable. When it is determined that the ceremony accessory is to be operated, the promotion lottery means (for example, sub-control) for performing promotion lottery as to whether or not to rewrite the registered effect information to the effect information having a higher degree of expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state. The circuit 101) and the effect information registration means rewrite the registered effect information based on the result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery means, and the accessory control means is the accessory movable lottery means. When it is determined that the movable accessory is to be operated, the movable accessory is operated, and the light emitting control means is based on the determination result of the accessory movable lottery means by the accessory control means. When an object is being operated, the light emission of the light emitting device is controlled based on the result of the promotion lottery of the promotion lottery means.

In such a game machine, when the movable accessory operates, promotion lottery of the effect information used for the transition lottery in the advantageous state is performed. Here, in a game in which the display means displays the effect information, a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state is performed based on the displayed effect information, so that the player is strongly interested in the promotion lottery of the effect information. Will embrace. On the other hand, since the movable accessory operates based on the determination result of the accessory movable lottery means when the display means does not display the effect information, the promotion lottery is hidden that is not displayed on the display means. It will be done for the information given. By notifying the player that the promotion lottery for the hidden information is being performed by using the movable accessory, the situation becomes advantageous to the player (winning the promotion lottery). Expectations for what they are doing will continue, and they will continue to play without getting bored. In addition, by controlling the light emission of the light emitting device according to the result of the promotion lottery, it is possible to infer the expectation that the situation is advantageous from the light emission (for example, color) of the movable accessory. If it can be presumed that the player has an advantage, he / she will have a strong interest in the later game, so that the player can continue the game without getting bored.

[Appendix 18]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

In a game machine equipped with such an AT (ART) function, an AT lottery for whether or not to perform AT during the bonus game may be performed, and the result of the AT lottery may be announced at the end of the bonus game. For example, the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-183284) states that if the number of remaining payouts reaches 16 to 30 during a bonus game, the bonus game may end in the remaining two games. Has proposed a game machine that switches the video display to a challenge notification screen that notifies the presence or absence of a winning AT (ART).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, since the number of medals given during the bonus game differs depending on the internal winning combination, the number of medals awarded depends on the internal winning combination after switching the video display to the challenge notification screen. May not be reached. In such a case, if the presence or absence of the winning of the AT is notified as in Patent Document 1, the processing at the end of the bonus game will be executed even though the bonus game has not ended. It will give a feeling of distrust to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a player of the end time of a state advantageous to the player such as a bonus. To do.

[Means to solve problems]
The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine in which the maximum number of game media given in a unit game is a predetermined number, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, etc.) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed are displayed. 3R), a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reel, and a start operation detection means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for detecting a start operation by a player. , A symbol changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, and the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the above, and the plurality of reels are provided. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for detecting the stop operation for stopping each reel, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing, and the reel stop control. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the means, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means wins a prize based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. When it is determined by the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that determines whether or not the winning combination is won or not, and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means by the winning determination means, the winning combination is placed on the effective line. A profit-giving means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that grants a number of game media according to a combination of stopped symbols, and a profit-state starting means (for example, a bonus state) that starts a profit state (for example, a bonus state) triggered by a predetermined condition. For example, a main control circuit 91), a counting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that counts the number of game media granted by the profit-giving means during a profit state, and a game medium counted by the counting means. A profit state termination means (for example, main control circuit 91) that terminates the profit state when the number exceeds a threshold value (for example, 59 sheets), and an effect control means (for example, sub) that controls an effect to be executed during the profit state. The control circuit 101) is provided, and the effect control means is based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. When the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined number from the threshold value at the detection timing, the profit state end effect is produced as an effect at the end of the game according to the detected start operation. As a result of the game medium being given by the profit-giving means in the game corresponding to the start operation detected by the start operation detection means, the number of game media counted by the counting means exceeds the threshold value. In that case, the registered profit state end effect is executed, and when the number of game media counted by the counting means is equal to or less than the threshold value, the registered profit state end effect is set to the profit state. It is characterized by changing to a continuous production and executing the profit state continuous production.

In such a game machine, when the number of game media given during the profit state may exceed the threshold value at the timing when the start operation is detected, the profit state end effect is performed as the effect at the end of the game. Register. At this time, depending on the number of game media actually given in the game, the number of game media given during the profit state may not exceed the threshold value. Therefore, in the game machine according to the present invention, in the game. Based on the result of granting the game medium, the registered profit state end effect is changed to the profit state continuation effect. That is, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the profit state end effect is registered once at the start of the game in which the profit state may end, but the profit state does not end as a result of the game, The profit state continuation effect is executed without executing the profit state end effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect at the end of the profit state from being executed even though the profit state has not ended, and as a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end of the profit state. ..

[Appendix 19]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

In addition to the replay time, there is also known a gaming machine that notifies the player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination. It should be noted that notifying information that gives the player an advantage is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Then, a game machine that performs AT during the replay time may be called an ART machine or the like.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In recent years, a game machine that performs AT during the above-mentioned inter-flag RT is also known. In such a game machine, if the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is won, the RT between the flags will end, so the player will stop the game while performing a stop operation so that the bonus will not be won. Will be done. By the way, since the knowledge about the game machine differs depending on the player, there is a possibility that the player who has little knowledge about the game machine may be disadvantaged in the game machine that requires a predetermined stop operation during the RT between flags. For example, for a player who has knowledge about a game machine, a player who does not have knowledge about a game machine can play a game while maintaining RT between flags by performing a stop operation so that a bonus is not won. , There is a possibility that the bonus will be won without performing this stop operation, and in this case, the RT between the flags may end, and as a result, the player may be disadvantaged.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the disadvantage suffered by a player who has no knowledge about the game machine.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , Display window 4), start operation detection means (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 64) for detecting start operation by the player, and rotation of the reel based on detection of start operation by the start operation detection means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the symbol by making the reels, and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. By stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the reel is displayed on the symbol display means. On an effective line provided on the symbol display means when the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. By the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and the winning determination means, based on the combination of the symbols stopped at. When it is determined that a specific combination has won a prize, the profit state is started, and when the end condition is satisfied in the profit state, the profit control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that ends the profit state and the reeling game are involved. A low RT state (for example, RT2) in which the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and a high RT state (for example, RT4) in which the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is higher than the low RT state. The first advantageous state (for example, the enemy determination ART) is triggered by the RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that controls the transition of the gaming state between the two and the game state and a predetermined condition (for example, winning the ART lottery). ) And the second advantageous state (for example, battle ART) that is performed following the first advantageous state, and the advantageous state (for example, ART gaming state) in which information on the advantageous stop operation related to the addition of the game medium is notified. Advantageous state starting means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for shifting the effect state related to the game, and the first advantageous state. A first advantageous state control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the state and a second advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that controls the progress of the game in the second advantageous state. When a predetermined combination (for example, a combination related to JACIN) is determined as an internal winning combination during the profit state, the RT control means shifts the game state to the high RT state and the profit state. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination (for example, C_JACIN1 to C_JACIN3) is displayed by the symbol display means, the gaming state is shifted to the low RT state, and the advantageous state starting means is the profit state. If the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the above, the effect state shifts to the advantageous state after the end of the profit state, and the first advantageous state control means is in the current game during the first advantageous state. A first effect information registration means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for registering effect information (for example, an effect ball) in a plurality of games from to a predetermined number of times ahead, and a first effect information (for example, for example) as the effect information. , A ally ball) is registered, a numerical addition means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that adds a predetermined number to the first numerical information (for example, the HP of a ally character), and a second effect information as the effect information. A second advantageous state starting means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that ends the first advantageous state and starts the second advantageous state in a game in which (for example, boss balls 1 to 8) is registered. The second advantageous state control means is provided with a second effect information registration means (for example, sub-control) for registering effect information in a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead during the second advantageous state. In the game in which the circuit 101) and the third effect information (for example, an enemy ball) are registered as the effect information, the first predetermined value is subtracted from the first numerical information, and the fourth effect information is used as the effect information. In a game in which (for example, a ally ball) is registered, a numerical value subtracting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that subtracts a second predetermined value from the second numerical information, and a result of subtraction of the numerical value subtracting means, the first A continuous control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that terminates the advantageous state when the numerical information becomes less than the threshold value and newly starts the first advantageous state when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value is provided. It is characterized by that.

In such a game machine, if a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the profit state, the player shifts to the high RT state, but when a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed, the player shifts to the low RT state. It ends up. Therefore, a player who has knowledge about a game machine can maintain a high RT state by playing a game while avoiding displaying a combination of symbols according to a predetermined combination, but has no knowledge about the game machine. The player may display a combination of symbols according to a predetermined combination and may fall from a high RT state to a low RT state.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an advantageous state in which information on an advantageous stop operation relating to the addition of the gaming medium is notified. This advantageous state ends when the first numerical information of the first numerical information and the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value first, and continues when the second numerical information becomes less than the threshold value first. Therefore, the value of the first numerical information has an influence on the duration of the advantageous state, and the first advantageous state in which the addition of the first numerical information is performed is about extending the duration of the advantageous state. It can be said that it is a chance period.

Here, the advantageous state is executed depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the profit state (low RT state or high RT state). Executed (regardless of whether it is in the RT state). Therefore, even if a player who has no knowledge of the game machine falls into the low RT state during the profit state, the chance period (first advantageous state) for extending the duration of the advantageous state after the profit state ends. ) Can be executed, and the disadvantage suffered by a player who has no knowledge about the game machine can be reduced.

[Appendix 20]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, there is known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information advantageous to the player so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning role. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize a gaming state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, a gaming machine in which the combination of symbols displayed is different according to the stop operation of the player is widely known, and when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, when the combination of the first symbol is displayed as a result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed, and when the combination of the second symbol is displayed as the result of the stop operation, AT or ART is executed. There are also known game machines that do not.

In a gaming machine that controls the gaming state according to the combination of symbols displayed in this way, the player can avoid the sub-control board from grasping that the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. There are known fraudulent acts such as command spills that give unfair profits. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, a command including information about the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be acquired on the sub-control board side. It is possible to avoid a disadvantageous state for the player, and as a result, the player gains an unfair advantage.

Therefore, when a player commits an illegal act during the game and a communication error (sequence error) occurs during communication between the main control board and the sub control board, a game machine that notifies that the error has occurred is provided. It is already known (see, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-059616)). In such a game machine, a liquid crystal display device, a sound, and a decorative lamp (LED) are used to notify that a sequence error has occurred, and the clerk at the game hall is made aware that fraudulent activity is being performed. Can be terminated, so that a fraudulent act that induces a sequence error is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the profit of the game.

In a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, the game is performed by performing a stop operation three times following the operation of the start lever, so the order of commands transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board is determined. By checking the order of the commands acquired by the sub-control board, it is possible to identify whether or not a sequence error has occurred.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the game machine as described above, when the liquid crystal display device is not installed, even if the sequence error notification is executed by the sound and the decorative lamp, it is confused with the production of other game machines in the game hall. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of notifying the clerk of the sequence error is not transmitted, and the player can illegally obtain the profit of the game by cheating.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing illegally obtaining profits of a game by fraudulent acts.

[Means to solve problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is a low probability that the replay related to the re-game will be determined as the internal winning combination (for example, the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state) and the probability that the replay will be determined as the internal winning combination. A gaming machine having a high RT state (for example, RT4 gaming state) higher than the normal state, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels. A symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of displayed symbols, a start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, a main control circuit 91, a start switch 16S), and On condition that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel and the start operation by the start operation detecting means An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations based on the detection of the above, and each reel provided corresponding to the plurality of reels. The stop operation is performed by the stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop switch 64) for detecting the stop operation for stopping, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. A reel stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the detected timing, and the reel stop. A determination means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining a combination of stopped symbols on an effective line provided on the symbol display means based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the control means, and the usual When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the state (for example, when the RT4 transition lip is displayed), the RT start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that shifts the gaming state from the normal state to the high RT state, and the above. When it is determined that the predetermined symbol combination has stopped during the high RT state, the gaming state is shifted from the high RT state to the normal state, and when it is determined that the specific symbol combination has stopped, the said When the RT termination means for maintaining the high RT state (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the first lottery (for example, the lottery for transition to ART) performed during the normal state or the high RT state are won, the game is related. A specific effect state (for example, an ART game state) that informs the effect state of information on an advantageous stop operation. When the specific effect state start means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the second lottery (for example, the avoidance point lottery) performed during the high RT state are won, the probability of winning the first lottery is When it is determined that the high-probability state transition means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for shifting to the high-probability state (for example, the high-probability gaming state) and the predetermined symbol combination are stopped during the high-probability state. , A low-probability state transition means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that shifts to a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is low, and a game order determination means (for example, sub-control) that determines the progress order of one game. When the low-probability state transition means determines that the game is not progressing in a predetermined order during the high-probability state (for example, when a sequence error occurs). In addition, it is characterized by shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery performed in the normal state or the high RT state is won, the game shifts to a specific effect state (so-called ART) for notifying information of an advantageous stop operation. Further, if the second lottery is won during the high RT state, the high probability state is shifted to the high probability state in which the probability of winning the first lottery is high. Therefore, the high RT state is set as the transition chance section to the specific effect state (ART). be able to.

Here, if a predetermined symbol combination is stopped during the high RT state (= high probability state), the RT end means shifts from the high RT state to the normal state, but the symbol combination displayed due to fraud or the like is zero. If you do (cannot grasp), the high probability state will be temporarily maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is determined whether or not the progress of one game has progressed in a predetermined order, and if the game has not progressed in a predetermined order, the game is shifted to a low probability state. Even if the progress result (for example, the displayed symbol combination) is zeroed, the high probability state is not unreasonably maintained, and the player gains an unreasonable profit by cheating. Can be prevented.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the low probability state, the first lottery is performed on the condition that a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination or higher) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In the high probability state, the first lottery is performed on the condition that any of a plurality of combinations (for example, all combinations) including a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, in the high probability state, the first lottery is performed based on more kinds of combinations than in the low probability state, so that the high probability state is unreasonably maintained. And the player gets an unfair profit. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the progress of the game is not appropriate, the high-probability state is unreasonably maintained because the high-probability state is changed to the low-probability state regardless of the symbol combination. It is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit due to cheating.

[Appendix 21]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a game machine, it is common to perform various effects according to the progress of the game. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-144940), a swaying effect (vibration) is performed. A gaming machine capable of appropriately swinging the screen display while preventing an increase in data capacity is disclosed by arranging different image data on a plurality of layers and duplicating the display). ..

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the production of the game machine, it is required to switch the production according to the progress of the game such as when the reel starts rotating or when the reel stops, but in Patent Document 1, the production is switched according to the progress of the game. Nothing is disclosed about this, and further ingenuity is required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately switching the production according to the progress of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means for displaying the effect (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11), and a first effect and a second effect capable of switching from the pre-switching effect to the post-switching effect according to the progress of the game. An effect selection means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that selects an effect to be displayed in a predetermined game from a plurality of effects, and a display control means (for example, a display control means that controls the display means based on the effect selected by the effect selection means). For example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the detection means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that detects a request for switching the effect being displayed on the display means (for example, a start command and a reel stop command) according to the progress of the game. When the detection means detects the switching request, the display control means after switching from one layer that executes the pre-switching effect when the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means. By switching to another layer for executing the effect, the effect displayed in the display means is switched, and when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the effect to be executed in the same layer is before switching. It is characterized in that the effect displayed by the display means is switched by switching from the effect to the effect after switching.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first effect of switching the effect according to the progress of the game by switching the layer in which the effect is being executed, and a second effect of switching the effect according to the progress of the game in the same layer. , And selects an effect to be displayed from a plurality of effects including the first effect and the second effect. Here, when switching the production by switching the layers as in the first production, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flickering of the image before and after the switching of the production, but the production must be executed in each layer. The processing load will increase. On the other hand, when switching the effects to be executed on the same layer as in the second effect, the processing load can be suppressed, but flickering of the image may occur before and after the switching of the effects.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a preferable switching method is set in advance for each effect according to the connection of the effects before and after the switching, the processing load of each effect, and the like. Thereby, for example, for an effect (first effect) in which flicker is likely to occur before and after switching and causes discomfort to the player, a method for switching layers can be set, and flicker can occur. For an effect that does not bother you (second effect), you can set a method to switch the effect on the same layer. As a result, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to flickering when switching the effect, and the processing load is suppressed, so that the process is dropped according to the change of the effect. As a result, it is possible to appropriately switch the production according to the progress of the game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that urges the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the detection means is the first in response to the operation urged by the notification means. 1 The switching request is detected, and the second switching request is detected according to the progress of the game without performing the operation prompted by the notification means. In the display control means, the detecting means causes the first switching. When a request is detected, the effect displayed by the display means is switched from the pre-switching effect to the post-switching effect in response to the first switching request, and when the detecting means detects the second switching request. Is characterized in that the effect displayed by the display means is switched from the pre-switching effect to the second post-switching effect in response to the second switching request.

In gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines, a player may be prompted to operate a button such as a chance button, and the effect may be switched when the button is operated. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the effect of switching can be different depending on whether the button operation is performed or not, the game playability is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Even in this case, since a preferable switching method is set for each effect, the effect can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game.

[Appendix 22]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In a pachislot machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a stepping motor is driven and controlled to control a plurality of reels. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a game machine, it is common to perform various effects according to the progress of the game, and in particular, in recent years, not only a display device but also other devices (for example, in order to enhance the effect of the effect). A game machine that produces a production using a character) is also known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-900164) discloses a gaming machine that interlocks a display device and a movable body that can move to a position where a part of the display device overlaps to produce and display. There is.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a game machine, the display device and other devices are linked with each other during the production execution, and no inconvenience occurs. However, in a non-production state such as when various errors occur or when the menu screen is activated. , The presence of other devices makes it difficult to visually recognize the display contents of the display device (for example, error notification, menu screen display, etc.), and the presence of other devices may rather get in the way.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that does not interfere with the display of a display device.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a display device for displaying an image (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) and a recess provided on the front surface of the display device and having a reflecting surface for reflecting light along a plate surface toward the player. A transmission panel (for example, a light guide plate 401) in which a latent image (for example, a latent image 402) is formed by (for example, a reflection recess 402a) and a light emitting device (for example, LED 403) that emits light along the plate surface of the transmission panel. The display control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that controls the display of the display device, the light-emitting control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the panel control board 79) that controls the light emission of the light-emitting device, and the non-existence. A detection means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for detecting a call request of an effect image (for example, a screen for notifying an error, a menu screen) is provided, and the light emission control means outputs light emission based on the effect data. The effect executing means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that makes a request and the light emitting output control means (for example, a panel control board 79) that causes the light emitting device to emit light in response to an output request of the effect executing means are included. When the detection means detects a call request when the output request is received from the effect execution means, the light emission output control means gives priority to the call request over the output request and turns off the light emitting device, and the effect execution means. Makes a light emission output request based on the effect data regardless of whether or not the detection means detects a non-effect image call request, and the display control means requests that the detection means call the non-effect image. Is detected, a non-effect image is displayed on the display device.

According to such a game machine, when a light emitting device emits light rays to a transparent panel provided on the front surface of the display device, an image corresponding to a latent image formed on the transparent panel on the front surface of the display device is obtained. Is displayed, the display device and the transparent panel can be linked to perform the effect, and the effect can be produced as compared with the case where the effect is simply performed on the display device. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, when there is a request to call a non-effect image such as an error notification screen or a menu screen, the non-effect image is displayed on the display device and the light emitting device is turned off. As a result, when the non-effect image is displayed on the display device, the display on the display device is not disturbed and the visibility of the non-effect image is not impaired.

In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the call request for the non-effect image is prioritized over the output request for light emission, the transparent panel is used even when the call request is made during the execution of the effect using the transparent panel. The production using the above is interrupted, and the visibility of the non-production image is not impaired. Further, since the light emission output request from the effect executing means to the light emission output control means is made regardless of the call request of the non-effect image, the call request is made during the execution of the effect using the transparent panel. However, it is not necessary to add processing such as error processing to the effect processing itself, the processing can be simplified, and the occurrence of bugs can be suppressed. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a call request is made during the execution of the effect using the transparent panel, the output of the light emission is suppressed while internally continuing the animation of the light emission based on the effect data. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the non-effect image from being disturbed, and at the end of the display of the non-effect image, it is possible to restart the production using the transparent panel from the continuation of the processing that was continuously continued internally. It is possible to perform an effective effect using the display device and the transparent panel.

[Appendix 23]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, in order to improve game playability, a game machine provided with a decorative portion according to the model of the game machine is also known. The decorative part includes, for example, one that performs mechanical movement, light emission, or both, and such a decorative part is generally called a "accessory (movable accessory)". As a gaming machine using an accessory, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-042691) discloses a gaming machine in which a rotating movable accessory is installed on an upper part of a front door.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the movable accessory, the motor and the gear mechanism are consumed due to the load associated with the continuous operation for a long time, and in some cases, the effect peculiar to the movable accessory cannot be performed due to the occurrence of a failure. It will cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can reduce the consumption of movable accessories.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the consumption of movable accessories.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of movable parts (for example, a cover member 198) including an initial position (for example, a position where the eyeball body 203 becomes invisible to the player) and a predetermined position (for example, a position where the eyeball body 203 is exposed). A movable accessory (for example, a rotating accessory 200) that can be moved to the position of, and an accessory control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a rotating accessory control board 78) that controls the operation of the movable accessory. The accessory control means is movable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, including a time measuring means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for measuring a non-operation time indicating a period during which the player's operation is not accepted. When the movable part of the movable accessory is moved from the initial position to a predetermined position (for example, the position where the cover member 198 is in the semi-open state), and the timekeeping means moves the movable portion of the movable accessory to the predetermined position. When the non-operation time measured by the timing means reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), the accessory control means sets the movable portion of the movable accessory to the initial position. A game machine characterized by returning to.

When the non-operation time reaches a predetermined time, it is highly possible that the player has not performed any operation and is not playing. In this way, if the unique effect of the movable accessory is continued even when the game is not in progress, the movable accessory will be consumed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the non-operation time is predetermined. When the time is reached, the movable part of the movable accessory is returned to the initial position to reduce the consumption of the movable accessory. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from being unnecessarily consumed while improving the interest of the game by a unique effect using the movable accessory.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition is characterized in that the state in which the game is performed is the advantageous state and the start operation of the game is performed.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is performed during the advantageous state, the movable part of the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position, and a unique effect using the movable accessory during the advantageous state is produced. It can be done and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix 24]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there are known game machines that notify a player of information that is advantageous to the player so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning role. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that a replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high for notification of information advantageous to the player. ), It is also common to realize an advantageous state (ART) that is advantageous to the player.

In a game machine equipped with such an ART function, a chance zone with a high expectation of transition to the ART state is provided, and if a specific condition is satisfied in this chance zone, control is performed to shift to the ART state with a high probability. There is. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-048945), when a specific symbol combination (RT operation symbol 1) is aimed in the chance zone (CZ) and a specific symbol combination is displayed, the replay is internal. A gaming machine that controls the transition to a high RT with a high probability as a winning combination is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
A so-called complete-run type chance zone is also known in which a gaming machine using a chance zone always shifts to an ART state when a predetermined number of games are played in the chance zone. However, in such a complete chance zone, the player simply wants to continue until the chance zone is completed, and there is a problem that the playability in the chance zone becomes monotonous. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game during a predetermined period of time, which triggers a transition to an advantageous state advantageous for the player. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 64) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. (For example, the main control circuit 91), a stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning. Variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. Based on the combination, the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the advantageous state triggered by a predetermined condition. By the lottery state start means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that starts the advantageous state lottery state (for example, CZ) that grants the right granting lottery, and the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous state lottery state. When the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a first right-giving lottery (for example, a lottery for transition to ART performed in the middle of CZ) is performed to grant the right to perform the advantageous state with a predetermined probability, and in the advantageous state lottery state. Advantageous state lottery means for performing a second right-giving lottery (for example, a lottery for transition to ART when the CZ is completed) that grants the right to perform the advantageous state with a specific probability after a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) of unit games have elapsed. (For example, the sub-control circuit 101) and a predetermined symbol combination are displayed on the effective line. When indicated, or when the predetermined number of unit games have elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state, the lottery state ending means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for ending the advantageous state lottery state and the advantageous state lottery means The right number management means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for counting the total number of times of the first right granting lottery and the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the second right granting lottery, and the advantageous state. When the lottery state is completed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for executing the advantageous state is provided for the total number of times counted by the right number of times management means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the advantageous state lottery state (chance zone), the second right-granting lottery is performed when a predetermined number of unit games for which the advantageous state lottery state ends are performed. , It is possible to realize a so-called finish-type chance zone in which a lottery is performed to an advantageous state at the time of finish. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first right-granting lottery is performed not only when the race is completed but also when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state lottery state, so that the player is advantageous. Not only do they want the state lottery state to continue, but they are also interested in the first entitlement lottery during the advantageous state lottery state. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the games in the advantageous state lottery state, which triggers the transition to the advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the games in the advantageous state lottery state. it can.

In addition, the advantageous state lottery state may end when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. However, if it is possible to avoid displaying a predetermined symbol combination, the advantageous state lottery state does not end. Therefore, the advantageous state lottery state can be continued according to the stop operation of the player, and the player has a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the player is in the advantageous state lottery state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous state lottery state ends, the advantageous state is executed for the total number of times of the right to perform the advantageous state granted as a result of the right granting lottery performed during the advantageous state lottery state. To do. Here, depending on the game machine, for example, there is a game machine that grants only one right to perform an advantageous state during the advantageous state lottery state, but in such a game machine, the player tends to feel dissatisfaction, and in particular, In the case of a finish-type chance zone (advantageous state lottery state), even if the race is continued for a long period of time, only one right can be obtained, so that the player's satisfaction is halved. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the right granting lottery is won a plurality of times during the advantageous state lottery state, the player is given the right to perform the advantageous state for a plurality of times. It does not make the player feel dissatisfied. Also, for the player, if the stop operation can be performed so that the advantageous state lottery state does not end when the first right granting lottery is performed, then the first right granting lottery and the second right granting lottery are performed. Since the opportunity to receive the game is further increased, the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and the interest of the game during the advantageous state lottery state can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second mode in which the probability of granting the right to perform the advantageous state in the first right grant lottery is higher than that of itself based on the number of unit games elapsed in the advantageous state lottery state. A first mode (for example, CZ mode 0) that shifts to (for example, CZ mode 1) and a second mode that does not shift to a first mode having a higher probability than the first mode and a lower probability than itself. It is characterized by having a mode.

According to such a game machine, if the first mode is changed to the second mode during the advantageous state lottery state, the second mode is not changed to the first mode thereafter, so that the advantageous state lottery state has elapsed. As the number of unit games increases, the probability of winning the first right-granting lottery increases. For the player, it is desirable that the advantageous state lottery state continues for a long time, so that the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation during the advantageous state lottery state, and it is possible to improve the interest during the advantageous state lottery state. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the lottery state starting means starts the advantageous state lottery state, the number of transitions for determining the number of times of the unit game to shift from the first mode to the second mode is determined. The means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 for determining CZ_MAP) and the effect means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101, the liquid crystal display device 11) for producing an effect different from that of the first mode in the second mode. It is characterized by further preparing.

According to such a game machine, the player can grasp or infer that the mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode from the effect mode of the effect means. Since the second mode is a mode in which the right to perform an advantageous state is highly likely to be granted, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the game will shift to the advantageous state in the subsequent game, which is advantageous. State It is possible to improve the interest during the lottery state.

1 ... Pachislot, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 200 ... Rotating accessory (movable) (Characteristics), 91 ... Main control circuit, 101 ... Sub control circuit, 93 ... Main CPU, 102 ... Sub CPU

Claims (4)

A movable accessory whose predetermined movable part can move between the first position and the second position,
An accessory control means for controlling the operation of the movable accessory,
Timekeeping means to time the time when the game is not in progress,
With
The accessory control means can move the predetermined movable portion of the movable accessory from the first position to the second position when a specific condition is satisfied.
The timekeeping means starts timekeeping at a predetermined timing and
When the time measured by the timing means reaches a predetermined time, the accessory control means moves the predetermined movable portion of the movable accessory from the second position to the first position, and then a game. Is advanced, the gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined movable portion of the movable accessory is moved to the second position. As a state in which the game is performed, there are a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific condition is a transition to the advantageous state. The movable accessory has a specific movable portion behind the predetermined movable portion, and the movable accessory has a specific movable portion.
The specific movable portion becomes visible when the predetermined movable portion moves to the second position.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the accessory control means executes an effect peculiar to the advantageous state by moving the specific movable portion. Further equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the effect executing means executes the effect in an energy-saving manner when the time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time.